Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D14-0173 - VICTORIA'S SECRET - TENANT IMPROVEMENTVICTORIA'S SECRET 230 SOUTHCENTER MALL D14-0173 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: htto://www.TukwilaWA.Aov DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Parcel No: 9202470130 Address: 230 SOUTHCENTER MALL Project Name: VICTORIA'S SECRET Permit Number: D14-0173 Issue Date: 7/28/2014 Permit Expires On: 1/24/2015 Owner: Name: WESTFIELD PROPERTY TAX DEPT Address: PO BOX 130940 , CARLSBAD, CA, 92013 Contact Person: Name: MARY RYAN Address: PO BOX 3749 , MISSION VIEJO, CA, 92690 Contractor: Name: PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC Address: PO BOX 426 , GLENWOOD, IA, 51534 License No: PINNACI941K3 Lender: Name: N/A - TENANT FUNDED Address: Phone: (949) 582-3735 Phone: (712) 527-9745 Expiration Date: 9/19/2016 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: TENANT REMODEL OF EXISTING RETAIL SPACE TO INCLUDE PARTITIONS, CEILINGS, FIXTURES, DOORS, ETC. Project Valuation: $585,000.00 Fees Collected: Type of Fire Protection: Sprinklers: YES Fire Alarm: YES Type of Construction: IIB Electrical Service Provided by: TUKWILA FIRE SERVICE $9,356.72 Occupancy per IBC: 1-4 Water District: TUKWILA Sewer District: TUKWILA SEWER SERVICE Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: International Residential Code Edition: International Mechanical Code Edition: Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: 2012 2012 2012 2012 International Fuel Gas Code: WA Cities Electrical Code: WA State Energy Code: 2012 2012 2012 Public Works Activities: Channelization/Striping: Curb Cut/Access/Sidewalk: Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling/Oversize Load: Land Altering: Landscape Irrigation: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Water Main Extension: Water Meter: Volumes: Cut: 0 Fill: 0 Number: 0 No Permit Center Authorized Signature: LL) I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit and agree to the conditions attached to this permit. Signature: Print Name: �J5 y ,i1/lc C►Li-e-<_ Date: -1 - 215,--\ This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 clays from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 22: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 4: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 20B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 5.4) 1: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand- held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand-held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 2: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 3: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 7.2, 7.3) 5: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 6: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 7: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 8: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.9.1) 9: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1) 10: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.6) 11: Aisles and aisle access ways serving as a portion of the exit access in the means of egress system shall comply with the requirements of this section. Aisles or aisle access ways shall be provided from all occupied portions of the exit access which contain seats, tables, furnishings, displays and similar fixtures or equipment. The required width of aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1017.1) 12: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1011.6.3) 13: Emergency lighting facilities shall be arranged to provide initial illumination that is at least an average of 1 foot-candle (11 lux) and a minimum at any point of 0.1 foot-candle (1 lux) measured along the path of egress at floor level. Illumination levels shall be permitted to decline to 0.6 foot-candle (6 lux) average and a minimum at any point of 0.06 foot-candle (0.6 lux) at the end of the emergency lighting time duration. A maximum -to -minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded. (IFC 1006.3.1) 16: Fire protection systems shall be maintained in accordance with the original installation standards for that system. Required systems shall be extended, altered or augmented as necessary to maintain and continue protection whenever the building is altered, remodeled or added to. Alterations to fire protection systems shall be done in accordance with applicable standards. (IFC 901.4) 14: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of Factory Mutual or any fire protection engineer licensed by the State of Washington and approved by the Fire Marshal prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance No. 2436). 15: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide. (NFPA 13-8.6.5.3.3) 17: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2437.(ALL FIRE ALARM COMPONENTS TO BE TIED TO THE MAIN MALL FIRE ALARM PANEL,) 19: Maintain fire alarm system audible/visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible/visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2437) 18: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2437) (IFC 901.2) 20: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 21: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 23: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.9 of the International Building Code. 24: Post address on storefront per approved Westfield standards 25: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 26: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. 27: ***BUILDING PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 28: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 29: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 30: The special inspections and verifications for concrete construction shall be as required by IBC Chapter 17, Table 1705.3. 31: The special inspections for steel elements of buildings and structures shall be required. All welding shall be done by a Washington Association of Building Official Certified welder. 32: When special inspection is required, either the owner or the registered design professional in responsible charge, shall employ a special inspection agency and notify the Building Official of the appointment prior to the first building inspection. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official in a timely manner. 33: A final report documenting required special inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted to the Building Official. The final inspection report shall be prepared by the approved special inspection agency and shall be submitted to the Building Official prior to and as a condition of final inspection approval. 34: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the seismic design requirements for nonstructural components. ASCE 7, Chapter 13. 35: Partition walls shall not be tied to a suspended ceiling grid. All partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterially braced to the building structure. Such bracing shall be independent of any ceiling splay bracing. 36: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 37: Fire retardant treated wood shall have a flame spread of not greater than 25. All materials shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. Such identification shall be issued by an approved agency having a service for inspection at the factory. 38: Special inspection for sprayed fire-resistant materials applied to structural elements and decks is required. Special inspections shall be based on the fire -resistance design as designated in the approved construction documents. 39: All rack storage requires a separate permit issued through the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Rack storage over 8-feet in height shall be anchored or braced to prevent overturning or displacement during seismic events. The design and calculations for the anchorage or bracing shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. Periodic special inspection is required during anchorage of storage racks 8 feet or greater in height. 40: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 41: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 42: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 43: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 44: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 45: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 1700 BUILDING FINAL** 0611 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 0450 F&S RESISTANT PEN 1400 FIRE FINAL 0409 FRAMING 0606 GLAZING 0502 LATH & GYPSUM 4027 SI-COLD-FORM WELD 4046 SI-EPDXY/EXP CONC 4028 SI-REINF STEEL -WELD 4039 SI-SEISMIC RESTIST 4025 SI-STEEL CONST 4026 SI-STRUCT STEEL 4004 SI-WELDING 0406 SUSPENDED CEILING Tenant Name: CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.TukwilaWA.gov CONSTRUCTION PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **Please Print** King Co Assessor's Tax No.: Site Address: SOUthCe ntPg-170t-W \A V-\ ho 1 air Seu_rt PROPERTY O Name: VU Q S Address: 1kvo Io l ttshl eQ Blvd • (I T100a) City: 11 State: ch Zip: q 05 Name: t A a Rtioin Address: PO Box :31 City: Mis• sion ��?�o state: CA Zip:9 q 0 Phone: Lig 5i3 23.135 Fax: 0149 lnh 614 Email: h1aQ.11@ PP,e,mit-K-eLouQu . c,n4 GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: `T. PJ•O. Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: °I?-fl2�1'l a tv Suite Number: IOO Floor: I New Tenant: ❑ Yes 121 ..No Company Name: f\ 1 O: t1 C h. 1 r C. Architect Name: 131 G 1 R.. S . Lea In Address: 1 1pLi �J� t�l. SC offs an le ed . Qt. 1°I City: SCott5dal� State: , Zi :8425�}- Phone: ciAttA 019,13 L'1rax: LL'2:0) 9, t3 1223 Email: ; ed _} olll \So -Fitt h . c o M NC Company Name: 0,0nS O 11 clatcd m69 Engineer Name: >ri kte\vui ttiRscn Address: MOW. \(all View St-. Sft 225P5 City: (.1acien eove tare: CA Zip:91845 Phoneb`4 eft 1Fax: (1t`r) g1372014 Email: Name: Address: NI I City: State: Zip: 5 Inc HAApplications\Forns-Applications On Line\2011 Applications\Pamit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised August 2011 bh Page 1 of 4 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ ',SQ`)1 COO Existing Building Valuation: $ (SNa-1LJ Describe the scope of work (please provide detailed information): T • . FV\1 tryxo&e,k 0f Cc) (2Q-trAi 1 S7c�C.e_ �n C 1vcltc� paRifionS c e.. \ 1 t rv5S , 6 Otre-S , —PR x -t.,�-ems, �-*c . \ G P �,a o ee*_ . Will there be new rack storage? ® Yes I'* Floor Floor ❑.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. MG R Csa 3' Floe st to A Co Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? 0 Yes No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: Sprinklers 0 Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes ❑ No If "yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2"x 11 "paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. 1t H:Wpplicatiore\Forn -Applications On Line \ 2011 Applcatioes\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 hh Page 2 of 4 Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZE AGENT: ____,..„) Signature: Date: I l I Print Name: M Ol R.c t 2 LiA, n Day Telephone: cP441 S B Z 3 -13 Mailing Address: PO B0 �L .. 5 1'�T ° , M I6slOn \\4.o City cA ci2A4clo State zip H:\Applimtions\Fors-Applications On Line\2011 Appbcaliore\Permit Application Revised - 8.9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 4 of 4 Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID PermitTRAK $5,780.87 D14-0173 Address: 230 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 9202470130 $5,780.87 DEVELOPMENT $5,505.80 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $5,501.30 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE 8640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $275.07 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $275.07 TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R2696 $5,780.87 Date Paid: Monday, July 28, 2014 Paid By: PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC Pay Method: CHECK 27011 Printed: Monday, July 28, 2014 11:20 AM 1 of 1 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY I PAID $4,347.87 D14-0173 Address: 230 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 9202470130 $3,575.85 DEVELOPMENT $3,575.85 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.830.00.00 0.00 $3,575.85 EL14-0540 Address: 230 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 9202470130 $454.41 ELECTRICAL $454.41 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.832.00.00 0.00 $454.41 M14-0118 Address: 230 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 9202470130 $262.43 MECHANICAL $262.43 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.322.102.00.00 0.00 $262.43 PG14-0098 Address: 230 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 9202470130 $55.18 PLUMBING $55.18 PERMIT FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R2315 R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $55.18 $4,347.87 Date Paid: Tuesday, June 10, 2014 Paid By: PERMIT RESOURCES INC. Pay Method: CHECK 22548 Printed. Tuesday, June 10, 2014 8:46 AM 1 of 1 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd:, 41100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Date Called: Special Instructions: Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. QCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: NSPECTION FEE R WIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PE MIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Project C, I c CPC I A ` E T of inspection: Fav A+64 L �f H IlI')N., Address: L?O 5C Ir✓1 A L... Date Cried: I- 4 A L- Specia Instruc ons: bate Want : <,i.tts: p.m. Requester: Phone No: ES4Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. coMM 4 gwncuc.e.vc9 - pry 2_ , t)o Ci Jl,4 AfTeil / t—) N - ' JE JJ CdLIfi Z/A%(.0 — sa� ofeAA• i( y , i,v 4L .,e /ivr, /Vrst/ L 6 - •fFFC/E Date: /4. 3 SPECTION FEE RUQUIRED. Prio to next inspection, fee must be at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 00. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT N CITY OFTUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., B100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Proj•ecS:t �l t i A GJ ` Type of inspection: S uSp Of t. + 11 Address: — Date titled: 10 ' Special Instructions: Date Wanted: Requester: Phone No: LApprbvecl. per applicable codes. C6MMENTS: ElCorrections required prior to approval. ?1.5/1« 4,4 OoiIr.L5 - dof,uf r6-0S ilPpis r, s iv 1-4 1;,1/4( 4.04,410/ Date: _%17 NSPECTION FEE MIRED. 'Pr or to next inspection, fee must be id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 4311-2451 Project: ` ,i io Type of Inspection: Address: j q� iti*\ Date Called : Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 0 11, lir CD?. P.m. 'Requester: Phone No: QApproved per applicable codes. DCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS:' 6.2) j ;2't,n\' J 7 - prevc- `:ax--1 0 D/e / 1-- /9 NSPECTION FEE RE UIRED. Prior (o next inspection, fee must be id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd:, Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OFF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #6100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Type of pectin Date Called: Special Instructions: bate Wanted Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Q Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: REINSPECTION FEE RE D. Prior.to next inspection. fee must be 1-1 paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit IN PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-367 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 w-a73 Projes � � t � JA 4 _ Type of Inspection:C `AIS pW1JPiN ,i< L.t #4 6 Address: Date Called: Special Instructions: Date W ted: `( �'�� rn. Requester: Phone . Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: n)eep jc�vr' c-n-� � sef;e& Co of 2 Ins Date: t t.. f k REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. F3 or to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Btvd., S • 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit IN I PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 981.88 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Pro t{za Ty�p--eofInspection j r Addres • Date Called. Special Instructions: bate Wanted: a.m. Requester Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. t...J Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: (I)S ---- �j , e t Ssl�.tl 1' U c ,0 SPECTION FEE RE IRED. Prior o next inspection:fee must be at 6300 South5e ter vd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit D ( `Sr`PERMIT NO. -1.;Q„F,.IUlKWlLA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., *100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Pro t•. -type f inspec on: rgoY1 tt Special -instructions: Date Called: Date j ztedi Requester: (Li Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval OMMENTS: Si,k1✓—(1L kx/P i -ilk - -cat.s«re,,kelod cf) 4 ') is'- '•.,ram ;. INSPECTION FEE QUIRED. Prig, to next inspection, fee must be d at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INS • N+. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA .BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Proj ` �T J ' {- 4- J &tJ of Inspection: .s. e....01' �...,. 4 lr Addres : 236 St a i Date Called: Specia Instructions: 'Date Wanted: Requester: iu Ehoneitim proved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Ei REINSPECT! Date: D. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Cast to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit eft-0173 PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Pro t! �-- •s� 0 1,_P6 t Type of i ction: ,44 i Ad s `�_it Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Warmed: V (� a.m. PAIL Requester Phone No: QApproved per applicable, codes. tJ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: rr� I m,.s A(P-- er rOIS iOPPL- 2Q110 /Q-4, to Data: SPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prlorfto next inspection. fee must be at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS 0116 CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: I I tA{{ zA. r i x r..c Type of Inspection: r � �. 1 Vet I --- Address: Suite #: SC A.&4r/ Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 1-/vitc AzAd 54,71 fe7A-r, z, /6z Ao- Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector:, t, Date: /W./ V Hrs.: / 0 /r $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD: Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: ti4.— Type of Ins ion: 't frIt . c t.) kr' pi Address: Suite #: 2 3 ►-.., Mk 1 1 Contact Pe son: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector. Date: !a%// y' Hrs.: 7 a $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You willreceive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT -,- Project: j 1J 1 C- 1-1 - Type of Inspection: Sip c_rat- Address: Suite #: se mkt( Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: -1,4eNc(- N eds Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire.Alarm: Hood & Duct: M itor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: Date: / Y Hrs.: .0 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NUMBER i 1 -- O1-73 PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project:`/ V► c-tyr , cs, c r Type of Inspection: v 2 ,- 50 Address: Suite #: Z3° vt,A k ( f Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: t _ c r� /le% i // s-,., 13 ` F75 (G. -7-� /an) o c / s1- I ‘ Alf ..�-�.��.._ (74 rtc Ai j / Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector r4- Date: 10/ /, y Hrs.: /, r') $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NUMBER D/-O/? / 5-/1. PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila Wa. 981RR 2� Project: 1/jam, (/ cf-o ► Yr- S2Ccjt:�-5 Type of I ion: -.,, a-T-.V/ S P 14741/ 0f p Address. 3,0 3 Suite #: S , C , ,,,\,,2, /,_._ Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: E,,Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Ofoei 940 r OK --fv C , v�-e - ,- , � i ck Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: g.$1-;2_ Date: V/b.// Hrs.: 02.' $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Address: Company Name: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy With permit INSPECTION NUMBER %s-/t1 PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206-575-4407 Project: VIA I Type of Inspection: �l � It 4Address. Suite #: Z'i.Avd...ki Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: c b J4.r'` Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: - Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspect : "011C3 Date: ,yi( i Hrs.: /. C.) $100.00J REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc State: 6/11/10 Zip: T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Mechanical Summary MECH-SUM 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group RI, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Revised June 2013 Project Info , IFia cco arrD. 0oak Project Address VICTORIA'S SECRET Date 6/27/2014 .303 SOUTHCENTER MALL, SPACE /100 - For Building Dept. Use TUKWILA, WA Applicant Name: Applicant Address: Applicant Phone: Project Briefly describe system type Description mechanical and features. Plans Include documentation requiring compliance with commissioning provisions per Section C408. • Indudes Compliance Option e0 Simple System 0 Complex System 0 Systems Analysis Equipment Schedules The following information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below. Cooling Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Equip Type Brand Nam& Model No.' Capacity2 Btu/h OSA CFM or Econo? SEER or EER IPLV3 Econmizer Option or Exceptions Heat Recovery Y/N ASU-1 SPLIT TRANE UCCA17/TTA240E 254000 1330 10 EER ECONO N AnU-1 SPLIT TRANE UCCA12/TTA180E 180000 1228 11 EER ECONO N Heating Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Equip Type Brand Name' Model No.' Capacity2 Bt OSA cfm Econo?,_,_Input FVIEWED Btuh FOR Output Btuh Efficiency4 Heat Recovery Y/N F COMPLIANCE APPROVED JUL 2 4 2014 Fan Equipment Schedule • Equip. ID Equip Type Brand Name' Model No.' M itri f Tamp FI w Controls Location of Service BUf DING DIVISIO Service Water Heating Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Equip Type Brand Name' Model No.' Input Capacity Sub- Category EFL Location of Service 1 If available. 2 As tested according to Table C403.2.3(1)A thru C403.2.3(8). 3 If r applicable. 5 Flow control types: variable air volume (VAV), constant volume (CV), RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 1 7 2014 PERMIT CENTER on, Efficiency, or AFUE, as 6 er except rmirAet T ON LTR# �..�..,._.. PH-orn 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Interior Lighting Summary LGT-SUM 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Revised June 2013 Project Info Project Address victoria s Secret - Southcenter trail Date 7/2/2014 Space No. 100 For Building Department Use hi.,, _ ' i`C`, Co 303 Southcenter Applicant Name: Seattle, Washington 98188 Applicant Address: Applicant Phone: Project Description I • New Building • Addition • Alteration Plans Induded Lighting Compliance Path • Lighting Power Density Calculations O Total Building Performance (If Total Building Performance then only LGT-CHK is required.) Interior Lighting Compliance Option Method 0 Being A MRJIEVVED FO . ace -by -space CODE CnMpLIAN(% Interior Lighting System Description Briefly describe lighting system type and features. APPROVED ECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 2 4 2014 JUL 1 1 2014 City of Tukwila PERMIT CENTER BUILDIr%j DlVI IQN Additions and Change of Space Use (C101.4. : 1 ., . • Addition area or Change of Space Use area complies with all applicable provisions as stand alone project area or Change of Space Use area is combined with existing building lighting systems to compliance with aN applicable provisions Building Area Method (LTG-INT-BLD) or Space -By -Space Method (LTG-INT-SPACE) Compliance Form. Document allowed and proposed (including existing if applicable) lighting wattage of Addition or Change of Use scope. Provide lighting controls per C405.2 and commissioning of lighting controls per C405.13. • Addition demonstrate Provide maximum applicable Alterations, Renovations and Repairs (C101.4.3.1) • 60% or more of luminaires in space replaced Building Area Method (LTG-INT-BLD) or Space -By -Space Method (LTG-INT-SPACE) Compliance Form. Document allowed and proposed (including existing) lighting wattage of project scope Provide maximum • Less than 60% of luminaires in space replaced Space -by -space Method (LTG-INT-SPACE) Compliance Form. Document existing total wattage in space and proposed existing) lighting wattage of project scope Provide (including ballast replacement within existing luminaires only — exdsting total interior building wattage not increased in Lamp and/or installed to serve added fixtures and/or fixtures relocated to new circuit applicable manual lighting controls (C405.2.1), occupancy sensors (C405.2.2.2), daylight zone controls (C405.2.2.3), application controls (C405.2.3), and commissioning of lighting controls per C405.13 • New wiring Provide specific lighting panel all applicable lighting controls as noted for New Wiring, automatic time switch controls (C405.2.2.1), and commissioning of controls per C405.13. • New or moved Provide lighting reconfigured - luminaires unchanged or moved only all applicable lighting controls as noted for New Wiring and commissioning of lighting controls per C405.13. • Space is Provide are being made to the interior lighting and space use not changed. • No changes CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 1 1 2014 PERMIT CENTER CORRECTION PILI.- orm 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Interior Lighting Summary - Space -by -Space LTG-INT-SPACE 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Revised June 2013 Project Info Project Address Victoria's secret - Southcenter Mall Date 7/2/2014 Space No. 100 For Building Department Use 303 Southcenter Applicant Name: Seattle, Washington 98188 Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Location (plan #, room #, or ALL) Space Type* Allowed Watts per 112 gross mtenor Area in fl2 wags Anoweo (watts/fe x area) E03.1 Sales area 1.68 8338 14008 E03.2 Storage 0.63 901 568 E03.2 Office - Enclosed 1.11 140 155 E03.2 Corridor/transition 0.66 200 132 E03.2 Restroom 0.98 140 137 Atrium** **tor .twtt *.tail Display 114oeaad. tea. Lot-rill-D!$P11T 11431 * Select Table C405.5.2(2) category from drop goon menu. ** For atriums, indicate height.AlloKed vettage for first 40 feet is 0.03 W/lt. ht., above 40 feet is 0.02 W/fi. ht. Pro osed Li htin Watta e Tota Area Allowed Watts 9719 26431 Location (plan #, room #, or ALL) Fixture Description (Include exempt equipment per Note 3) Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed Sales (AT) Reneged Downlight, LED, 1-12W 4 12 48 Sales (B5) Recessed Downlight, LED, 1-7W 19 7 133 Sales (B6/B8) Recessed downlight, LED 1-7W 26 7 182 Sales (BG) 9-Mini downlight, LED 9-3W 1 27 27 Sales (D3) 1-Light MH Dovnlight, MH 1-20w 2 26 52 Sales (D6) 1-Light MH Downlight, MH 1-20w 21 26 546 Sales (E2) 2-LED downlight, LED 2-18W 2 36 72 Sales (E9/EB) 1-Light LED Dovnligh, LED 1-7W 10 7 70 Sales (PM) 2-Light Pendant Light, LED 2-11W 7 22 154 Sales (W9) 1-Light Wall Sconce, LED 1-4W 4 4 16 Sales (WC1/WC2) 1-Light Wall Sconce, CFL 1-20W 6 20 120 Sales (WD1) 5-Light Wall Sconce, Halogen 5-15W 8 75 600 Sales (WF1) 1-Light Wall Sconce, CFL 1-20W 2 20 40 Sales (TS) Track Light 17 120 2040 Storage (FR/FG) 4' Surface Mt. Fluorescent Strip, 1-F32T8 20 32 640 Office (N2/N2E) lx4 Fluorescent Troffer, 1-F32T8 3 32 96 Office (PK) 35" Undershelft Task Light, 1F21T5 5 21 105 Corridor (AW/AX) Recessed Downlight, CFL 1-32W 7 36 252 Corridor (B6/B8) Recessed Downlight, LED 1-7W 2 - 7 14 Restroom (A3) Recessed LED Downlight, LED 1-13w 2 13 26 Restroom (W7) 1-Light Wall Sconce, CFL 1-20W 4 20 80 Lounge/Rec. (N3/N3E) 2-Lamp Fluorecent Troffer, 2-F32T8 5 64 320 '�� 19704 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 sto R2 and R3 Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allo►ied Watts for Interior Lighting Total Proposed Watts 25337 Notes: 1. For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. 2. For proposed Watts/Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input %attage of the fixture (not simply the lamp ►iattage) and other criteria as specified in Section C405.5.1. For line voltage track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire ►wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable, the ►wattage of current limiting devices or of the transformer. For low voltage track lighting list the transformer rated Nettage. 3. List all fixtures. For lighting equipment eligible for exemption per C405.5.1, note exception number and leave Watts/Fixture blank. • 2012 Washington State Ener•y Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Interior Display Lighting - Space -by -Space LTG-INT-DISPLAY 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Revised June 2013 Project Info Project Address Victoria's secret - Southcenter Mall Date 7/2/2014 Space No. 100 For Building Department Use 303 Southcenter Applicant Name: Seattle, Washington 98188 Maximum Allowed Display Lighting Wattage Location (plan #, room #, or ALL) Space Type' Allowed Watts per & " cross )ntenor Area in ft" vvaus mowed (watts/& x area) sales Retail 3: furniture, clothing, cosmetics, artwork 1.40 7808 10931 Only areas Whin retail sales areas that contain separately controlled display light maybe entered per Table C405.5.2(2) footnoteA. " From Table C405.5.2(2) footnote A. Proposed Display Lighting Wattage Total Area Area Watts 7808 10931 Display Allowance Only separately controlled display fixtures complying with C405.5.2(2) footnote A may entered here 11431 Location (plan #, room #, or ALL) Display Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed Retail 3 (D4) 2-Light MS Downlight, 2-20W 4 52 208 Retail 3 (37/D9) 2-Light M8 Downlight 2-20W 21 52 1092 Retail 3 (F2) 2' Fluorescent Strip 1-F17T8 4 17 68 Retail 3 (F4) 4' Fluorescent Strip 1-F32T8 51 32 1632 Retail 3 (87) 4' Fluorescent Strip 1-F32T8 45 32 1440 Retail 3 (L5) 6' Fluorescent Strip, 2-F25T8 2 50 100 Retail 3 (LT) Linkable LED, 3W 180 3 - 540 Retail 3 (LU) Linkable LED, 1.5W - 12 2 24 Retail 3 (R1) Milwork Lights 3 152 456 Retail 3 (RA1) Millwork Lights 2 292 584 Retail 3 (S2) Millwrok Lights 2 144 288 Retail 3 (SG) Gondola Lights 3 260 780 Retail 3 (SJ) Gondola Lights 3 48 144 Retail 3 (SV) Cabinet Light 1-F28T5 24 28 672 Retail 3 (SX) Cabinet Light 1-F14T5 24 14 336 Retail 3 (W4) Linear LED, 15W 52 15 780 Retail 3 (TS) Track Light 88 120 10560 Total Proposed Wattsl 19704 Notes: 1. For proposed Display Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. 2. For proposed Watts/Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum inp of the fixture (not simply the lamp wattage) and other criteria as specified in Section C405.5.1. For line voltage feater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable, the vettage of curie lighting list the transformer rated wattage. 3. List all display fixtures. transformer. For low voltage track RMJ Structural Engineers Robinson Meier Juilly & Associates PILE COPY VICTORIAS SECRET SouthCenter Mall 303 SouthCenter Mall Space #100, Tukwila, WA LSD&C No. 00060781 Structural Calculations for New Storefront Calculations Page Description 1A Project Description 01 Seismic Design Category 02 Storefront Soffit Loads 03-11 Beams 12-13 Lateral Analysis 14-16 Built-up Full Height Box Columns 17-18 Diagonal Lateral Support 19 Seismic Output File Prepared for: FITCH May 27, 2014 RMJ Job #14184 241 Joaquin Avenue San Leandro, CA 94577 www.rmjse.com RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUN 1 0 2014 PERMIT CENTER Principals Peter Robinson, S.E. Jayson E. Haines, S.E. El E D FORCOaROVENCEAPPD JUL 2 4 2014 BUI Tukwila DIVISION Expires: 4//1/ jfp RMJ Victoria's Secret SouthCenter Project Description: Sheet IA This project involves providing support for an interior mall storefront for the Victoria's Secret store at the above referenced location. Built-up box beams and columns provide gravity support at the entry and displays. Full height metal stud box columns provide lateral support against in -plane loads. Design is in accordance with 2012 International Building Code. RMJ VICTORIA'S SECRET SouthCenter Mall 241 Joaquin Ave. 303 SouthCenter Mall Space #100, Seatle WA San Leandro, CA 94577 Job No. 14184 Date: 5/16/2014 510.991.0977 By: mas Page: Find the Seismic Design Category (SDC) Project Location: Seatle, WA Zip Code: 98188 Soil Classification: D Table 1613.5.2 & Section 1613.5.2 Ocupancy Category: II Table 1604.5 Information from U.S. Geological Survey Website http://earthquake. usgs.gov/research/hazmaps/ Ss= 1.458 g Si= 0.544 g Fa= 1.00 Table 1613.5.3(1) Fv= 1.50 Table 1613.5.3(2) SMs= 1.46 g (Equation 16-37) SMI= 0.82 g (Equation 16-38) Sps= 0.97 g (Equation 16-39) SDI= 0.54 g (Equation 16-40) Seismic Design Category (SDC): D RMJ 241 Joaquin Ave. San Leandro, CA 94577 510.991.0977 VICTORIA'S SECRET SouthCenter Mall 303 SouthCenter Mall Space #100, Seatle WA Job No. 14184 Date: 5/16/2014 By: mas Page: Interior Storefront Soffit Loads Framing 5/8" Gypboard 9.18 plf Horiz. 362S162-33 DIAG. at 16" o.c. 4.42 pif Vert. 362S162-33 DIAG. at 16" o.c. 10.00 plf Diag. 362S162-33 DIAG. at 16" o.c. 1.54 plf Built -Up Box Beam 5.22 pif Sign Box 10.00 pif Misc. 28.30 pif Live Loads Live Load Total Load Only dead load, 2.7psf x 3.4' Total 68.7 pif Use 80.0 pif 10 psf x 2'-0" 20.0 pif 100.0 pif 80.0 plf used in determining lateral loads. These loads are loads per foot for EACH built-up box beam at Interior storefront. RMJ VICTORIA'S SECRET SouthCenter Mall 241 Joaquin Ave. 303 SouthCenter Mali Space #100, Seatle WA San Leandro, CA 94577 Job No. 14184 Date: 5/16/2014 510.991.0977 By: mas Page: Built-up Box Beam at Entry Maximum Length= 24.5 ft 294 in Maximum Moment=wx L2/8 = 7,503 ft-lb = 90,038 in -lb Built -Up Section 2-1200S162-54 Studs & 2-362T150-33 Tracks Only 2-1200S162-54 used in design of box beam l (net) = 31.46 Moment of Box Beam Ma= Deflection Ma= in4 121,462 in -lb (Prop86) 114,620 in -lb (SSMA Catalog) MMax 90,038 in -lb <Ma 114,620 in -lb CHECK OK! A = 5wL4 0.89 in 384E1 L Aa = 240 = 1.23 in DEFLECTION OK! Copyright (C) - SURE -TIE, INC. - 1992-98, All Rights Reserved. 1200S162-54 DIMENSIONS / PHYSICAL PROPERTIES : Web (A' ) = 12.000 in. Punchout = 1.500 in. (abar) = 11.943 in. Spacing = 24.000 in. (a ) = 11.717 in. Type = CONFORMING Flanges (B' ) = 1.625, 1.625 in. Thickness = 0.0566 in. KLX = 144.00 in. Fy = 50.000 ksi Fya-AXIAL = 50.000 ksi Fya-BEND = 50.000 ksi KLY = 48.00 in. Fu = 65.000 ksi (bbar) = 1.568, 1.568 in. h/t Web = 207.0 - EXCEEDS 200! Fu/Fy = 1.300 (b ) = 1.342, 1.342 in. w/t Flanges = 23.7, 23.7 Lip (C' ) = 0.500 in. Bearing Width = 1.500 in. KLT = 48.00 in. E = 29,500 ksi (cbar) = 0.472 in. (c ) = 0.359 in. Radius (R ) = 0.0849 in. KLB = 144.00 in. (r ) = 0.1132 in. (u ) = 0.1777 in. Net/Gross Section Used for Capacity = NET WALLBOARD PARAMETERS : Stud Spacing = 16.00 in. q-bar-o = 0.000 ksi G = 11,300 ksi Gamma = 0.000 in./in. DEFLECTION LIMIT / MOMENT COEFFICIENTS : Deflection = U360 Cmx = 1.000 Cmy = 1.000 Ey = 0.000 in. Fastener Spacing = 12.00 in. Ex = 0.000 in. GROSS / NET SECTION PROPERTIES BASED ON 1986 AISI SPECIFICATIONS (BOX! Area Gross = 1.792 inA2 Ix Gross = 31.471 inA4 Ix Net = 31.439 inA4 ly Gross = 3.589 inA4 ly Net = 3.173 inA4 m = 0.000 in. Bw = - 1.9309 in^5 ro = 4.423 in. Area Net = 1.622 inA2 Sx Gross = 5.245 inA3 Sx Net = 5.240 inA3 Sy Gross = 2.209 inA3 Sy Net = 1.952 inA3 J = 11.290308 inA4 Bf = 3.5386 in^5 Beta = 1.000 Rx Gross = 4.191 in. x-bar = 1.625 in. Rx Net = 4.403 in. Ry Gross = 1.415 in. y-bar = 6.000 in. Ry Net = 1.399 in. xo = 0.000 in. Cw = 6.1382 in^6 BI = 2.4617 inA5 j = 0.5669 in. Ixx/Iyy Required = 0.000/ 0.000 inA4 ALLOWABLE LOADS Lateral Loads (X/Y) = 0.00/ 0.00 F Overall Nominal Failure Load = 30,194 lbs. Overall Allowable Axial Load = 15,726 lbs. Omega = 1.! Nominal Y Axis Moment Capacity = 56,533 in-Ibs Allowable Y Axis Moment Capacity = 33,852 in-Ibs Ome Nominal Cap. (Web in Tension) = 56,533 in-Ibs Allowable Cap. (Web in Tension) = 33,852 in-Ibs Iyy Effective at Comp. Yield = 0.838 inA4 Min. Syy Effective at Comp. Yield = 1.131 inA3 Min. Nominal X-Axis Moment Capacity = 202,842 in-Ibs Allowable X-Axis Moment Capacity = 121,462 in-Ibs On Ixx Effective at Comp. Yield = 27.210 inA4 Sxx Effective at Comp. Yield = 4.078 inA3 Allow. Load Considering Lat. Load (Comp/Tension) = 15,726/ 48,564 Ibs. Lat. Load Moments (X/Y) = 0/ Allowable Shear Load on Unreinforced Web = Allowable End One -Flange Loading Reaction = Ixx for Deflection Determination = 31.471 inA4 - Iyy for Deflection Determination = 0.838 inA4 - 2,229 Ibs. > Actual Shear Load = 0 lbs. 1,044 Ibs. > Actual End Reaction = 0 Ibs. at Current Stress Level in Section of 8,777 psi at Maximum Stress Level in Section of 50,000 psi PROP86, Version 5.00 - RMJ & ASSOCIATES Printed On 05-16-2014 at 15:27:13 Page 1 Structural {S) Section Properties 6 Back to Table of Contents SSMA Section Qesfg >tcktless t ls l din): F ;' Area Weight (MI(Iblk) Gross;PropeMee ` Ix Sx Rx (in') OW) (in) ly (ini Ry (in) Ixe (in') Sxe (in'h ifecliveFropettiss; Mal 'Mad Vag (In-k) (in-k) (Ib) Vanet (Ib) TorsianafPrppertiea Jx1000 'Cw 'Xo m Ro (in') (in') • (in) (In). (in) b !u " 10005300-97 0.1017 33 1.677 5.71 24.318 4.864 3.808 1.702 1.007 24.318 4.671 103.39 2 94.70 8843' 6434 5.783 33.570 -1.838 1.158 4.346 0.821 66.9 10005300-97 0.1017 50 1.677 5.71 24.318 4.864 3.808 1.702 1.007 23.970 4.499 134.69 115.62 9864 7177 5.783 33.570 -1.838 1.158 4.346 0.821 57.4 10005300-118 0.1242 33 2.028 6.90 29.109 5.822 3.789 1.997 0.992 29.109 5.662 128.16 2 125.04 13189 7747 10.427 39.725 -1.811 1.144 4.315 0.824 65.8 10005300-118 0.1242 50 2.028 6.90 29.109 5.822 3.789 1.997 0.992 28.861 5.586 188.23 2 164.19 16235 9536 10.427 39.725 -1.811 1.144 4.315 0.824 53.8 10005350-54 0.0566 33 1.052 3.58 16.220 3.244 3.927 1.768 1.297 15.942 2.772 54.77 48.69 1661 1661 1.123 36.575 -2.546 1.566 4.857 0.725 88.9 10005350-54 0.0566 50 1.052 3.58 16.220 3.244 3.927 1.768 1.297 15.577 2.328 69.69 62.97 1661 1661 1.123 36.575 -2.546 1.566 4.857 0.725 72.2 10005350-68 0.0713 33 1.317 4.48 20.204 4.041 3.917 2.185 1.288 20.204 3.824 75.57 66.40 3345 3345 2.232 45.277 -2.529 1.557 4.837 0.727 88.7 10005350-68 0.0713 50 1.317 4.48 20.204 4.041 3.917 2.185 1.288 20.026 3.417 102.32 86.60 3345 3345 2.232 45.277 -2.529 1.557 4.837 0.727 72.0 10005350-97 0.1017 33 1.855 6.31 28.148 5.630 3.895 2.992 1.270 28.148 5.517 120,332 112.80 8843 6434 6.397 62.280 -2.492 1.538 4.795 0.730 84.1 10005350-97 0.1017 50 1.855 6.31 28.148 5.630 3.895 2.992 1.270 28.148 5.118 153.25 139.74 9864 7177 6.397 62.280 -2.492 1.538 4.795 0.730 71.6 10005350-118 0.1242 33 2.245 7.64 33.772 6.754 3.878 3.543 1.256 33.772 6.754 150.23 2 147.03 13189 7747 11.544 74.030 -2.465 1.524 4.764 0.732 83.1 10005350-118 0.1242 50 2.245 7.64 33.772 6.754 3.878 3.543 1.256 33.772 6.427 213.25 2 194.46 16235 9536 11.544 74.030 -2.465 1.524 4.764 0.732 67.8 12005162-54' 0.0566 33 0.896 3.05 15.730 2.622 4.190 0.212 0.486 14.743 2.109 41.68 36.38 1377 1377 0.957 6.340 -0.732 0.493 4.281 0.971 37.5 12005162-54' 0.0566 50 0.896 3.05 15.730 2.622 4.190 0.212 0.486 14.298 1.914 57.31 46.75 1377 1377 0.957 6.340 -0.732 0.493 4.281 0.971 30.5 12005162-68 0.0713 33 1.121 3.81 19.518 3.253 4.173 0.255 0.477 18.955 2.817 55.66 50.95 2771 2771 1.899 7.739 -0.719 0.485 4.261 0.972 37.2 12005162-68 0.0713 50 1.121 3.81 19.518 3.253 4.173 0.255 0.477 18.390 2.645 79.19 66.14 2771 2771 1.899 7.739 -0.719 0.485 4.261 0.972 30.2 12005162.97 0.1017 33 1.576 5.36 26.966 4.494 4.137 0.331 0.459 26.966 4.327 85.51 83.86 8147 7411 5.433 10.331 -0.691 0.470 4.219 0.973 36.4 12005162-97 0.1017 50 1.576 5.36 26.966 4.494 4.137 0.331 0.459 26.735 4.091 122.49 111.30 8147 7411 5.433 10.331 -0.691 0.470 4.219 0.973 29.5 12005162-118 0.1242 33 1.904 6.48 32.145 5.357 4.109 0.376 0.444 32.145 5.357 105.87 105.87 13189 9714 9.788 12.002 -0.670 0.459 4.187 0.974 35.8 12005162-118 0.1242 50 1.904 6.48 32.145 5.357 4.109 0.376 0.444 32.145 5.168 154.74 147.23 14986 11037 9.788 12.002 -0.670 0.459 4.187 0.974 29.0 12005200-54' 0.0566 33 0.953 3.24 17.662 2.944 4.306 0.393 0.643 16.678 2.425 47.93 42.47 1377 1377 1.017 11.550 -1.032 0.681 4.474 0.947 48.0 12005200-54' 0.0566 50 0.953 3.24 17.662 2.944 4.306 0.393 0.643 16.334 2.073 62.07 54.74 1377 1377 1.017 11.550 -1.032 0.681 4.474 0.947 39.0 12005200-68 0.0713 33 1.192 4.06 21.947 3.658 4.291 0.479 0.634 21.376 3.215 63.54 58.83 2771 2771 2.020 14.176 -1.017 0.673 4.455 0.948 47.7 12005200-68 0.0713 50 1.192 4.06 21.947 3.658 4.291 0.479 0.634 20.864 2.963 88.71 76.55 2771 2771 2.020 14.176 -1.017 0.673 4.455 0.948 38.7 12005200-97 0.1017 33 1.677 5.71 30.417 5.069 4.258 0.635 0,615 30.417 4.899 96.81 95.43 8147 7411 5.783 19.150 -0.987 0.656 4.414 0.950 47.0 12005200-97 0.1017 50 1.677 5.71 30.417 5.069 4.258 0.635 0.615 30.175 4.660 139.51 126.86 8147 7411 5.783 19.150 -0.987 0.656 4.414 0.950 38.1 12005200-118 0.1242 33 2.028 6.90 36.347 6.058 4.234 0.732 0.601 36.347 6.058. 119.71 119.71 13189 9714 10.427 22.451 -0.964 0.644 4.384 0.952 46.5 12005200-118 0.1242 50 2.028 6.90 36.347 6.058 4.234 0.732 0.601 36.347 5.865 175.59 166.80 14986 11037 10.427 22.451 -0.964 0.644 4.384 0.952 37.7 12005250-54' 0.0566 33 1.009 3.43 19.681 3.280 4.416 0.683 0.823 18.832 2.482 49.05 45.43 1377 1377 1.078 19.505 -1.378 0.892 4.699 0.914 59.6 12005250-54' 0.0566 50 1.009 3.43 19.681 3.280 4.416 0.683 0.823 18.433 2.149 64.34 58.39 1377 1377 1.078 19.505 -1.378 0.892 4.699 0.914 48.3 12005250-68 0.0713 33 1,263 4.30 24.484 4.081 4.402 0.836 0.813 23.963 3.496 69.08 62.95 2771 2771 2.141 24.034 -1.362 0.884 4.679 0.915 59.2 12005250-68 0.0713 50 1.263 4.30 24.484 4.081 4.402 0.836 0.813I23.575 3.007 90.04 81.59 2771 2771 2.141 24.034 -1.362 0.884 4.679 0.915 48.1 12005250-97 0.1017 33 1.779 6.05 34.016 5.669 4.373 1.121 0.794 34.016 5.496 108.60 102.52 8147 7411 6.134 32.734 -1.329 0.867 4.639 0.918 58.6 12005250-97 0.1017 50 1.779 6.05 34.016 5.669 4.373 1.121 0.794 33.835 5.037 150.82 135.37 8147 7411 6.134 32.734 -1.329 0.867 4.639 0.918 47.5 12005250-118 0.1242 33 2.152 7.32 40.726 6.788 4.350 1.307 0.779 40.726 6,788 134.13 133.19 13189 9714 11.065 38.619 -1.305 0.854 4.608 0.920 58.2 12005250-118 0.1242 50 2.152 7.32 40.726 6.788 4.350 1.307 0.779 40.726 6.541 195.84 178.57 14986 11037 11.065 38.619 -1.305 0.854 4.608 0.920 47.1 12005300.54' 0.0566 33 1.066 3.63 21.699 3.617 4.512 1.074 1.004 21.648 2.736 54.06 47.36 1377 1377 1.138 30.051 -1.743 1.111 4.940 0.876 70.8 12005300-54' 0.0566 50 1.066 3.63 21.699 3.617 4.512 1.074 1.004 21.043 2.272 68.04 60.65 1377 1377 1.138 30.051 -1.743 1.111 4.940 0.876 57.4 12005300-88 0.0713 33 1.335 4.54 27.020 4.503 4.499 1.320 0.994 26.918 4.064 80.30 65.72 2771 2771 2.262 37.126 •1.726 1.103 4.921 0.877 70.5 12005300.68 0.0713 50 1.335 4.54 27.020 4.503 4.499 1.320 0.994 26.510 3.317 99.32 84.79 2771 2771 2.262 37.126 -1.726 1.103 4.921 0.877 57.2 12005300-97 0.1017 33 1.881 6.40 37.616 6,269 4.472 1.786 0.974 37.616 6.035 133.592 116,06 8147 7411 6.484 50.853 -1.691 1.085 4.880 0.880 66.0 12005300-97 0.1017 50 1.881 6.40 37.616 6.269 4.472 1.786 0.974 37.085 5.831 174.57 141.05 8147 7411 6.484 50.853 -1.691 1.085 4.880 0.880 56.7 12005300-118 0.1242 33 2.276 7.75 45.106 7.518 4.452 2.095 0.959 45.106 7.323 165,76 2 154.65 13189 9714 11.704 60.251 -1.666 1.071 4.849 0.882 64.9 12005300-118 0.1242 50 2.276 7.75 45.106 7.518 4.452 2.095 0.959 44.727 7.232 243.672 201.68 14986 11037 11.704 60.251 -1.666 1.071 4.849 0.882 53.0 12005350-54' 0.0566 33 1.165 3.96 24.860 4.143 4.620 1.866 1.266 24.610 3.295 65.12 58.95 1377 1377 1.244 54.279 -2.363 1,478 5.341 0.804 88.0 12005350-54' 0.0566 50 1.165 3.96 24.860 4.143 4.620 1.866 1.266 24.087 2.787 83.46 75.92 1377 1377 1.244 54.279 -2.363 1.478 5.341 0.804 71.4 12005350.68 0.0713 33 1.460 4.97 30.996 5.166 4.608 2.306 1.257 30.996 4.908 96.98 80.83 2771 2771 2.473 67.251 -2.346 1.469 5.322 0.806 87.7 12005350-68 0.0713 50 1.460 4.97 30.996 5.166 4.608 2.306 1.257 30.916 4.061 121.59 104.89 2771 2771 2.473 67.251 -2.346 1.469 5.322 0.806 71.2 12005350-97 0.1017 33 2.059 7.01 43.269 7.211 4.584 3.159 1.239 43.269 7.071 154,22 2 138.56 8147 7411 7.098 92.672 -2.310 1.450 5.281 0.809 83.0 12005350-97 0.1017 50 2.059 7.01 43.269 7.211 4.584 3.159 1.239 43.269 6.590 197.31 170.84 8147 7411 7.098 92.672 -2.310 1.450 5.281 0.809 70.8 12005350-118 0.1242 33 2.494 8.48 51.992 8.665 4.566 3.741 1.225 51.992 8.665 192.74 2 181.90 13189 9714 12.821 110.302 -2.284 1.436 5.250 0.811 81.9 12005350-118 0.1242 50 2.494 8.48 51.992 8.665 4.566 3.741 1.225 51.992 8.260 274.07 2 238.96 14986 11037 12.821 110.302 -2.284 1.436 5.250 0.811 66.9 1400S162-541 0.0566 33 1.009 3.43 23.302 3.329 4,805 0.218 0.464 21.103 2.496 49.32 40.86 1177 1177 1.078 8.980-0.667 0.454 4.873 0.981 36.6 14005162-54' 0.0566 50 1.009 3.43 23.302 3.329 4.805 0.218 0.464 20.365 2.256 67.54 52.13 1177 1177 1.078 8.980 -0.667 0.454 4.873 0.981 29.7 1400S162-68 0.0713 33 1.263 4.30 28.952 4.136 4.787 0.262 0.456 27.357 3.357 66.33 57.96 2365 2365 2.141 10.966 -0.654 0.447 4.853 0.982 36.2 14005162-68 0.0713 50 1.263 4.30 28.952 4.136 4.787 0.262 0.456 26.375 3.135 93.85 74.56 2365 2365 2.141 10.966 -0.654 0.447 4.853 0.982 29.4 14005162-97 0.1017 33 1.779 6.05 40.115 5.731 4.748 0.340 0.437 39.965 5.248 103.71 97.69 6939 6939 6.134 14.651 -0.628 0.433 4.810 0.983 35.3 14005162-97 0.1017 50 1.779 6.05 40.115 5.731 4.748 0.340 0.437 38.897 4.915 147.14 127.96 6939 6939 6.134 14.651 -0.628 0.433 4.810 0.983 28.7 14005162-118 0.1242 33 2.152 7.32 47.928 6.847 4.719 0.385 0,423 47.928 6.659 131.59 129.07 12745 11287 11.065 17.032 -0.609 0.422 4.777 0.984 34.7 14005162-118 0.1242 50 2.152 7.32 47.928 6.847 4.719 0.385 0.423 47.772 6.282 188.07 171.63 12745 11287 11.065 17.032 -0.609 0.422 4.777 0.984 28.1 14006200-54' 0.0566 33 1.066 3.63 25.951 3.707 4.935 0.406 0.617 23.767 2.866 56.63 48,18 1177 1177 1,138 16,355 -0.946 0.633 5.062 0.965 47.0 14005200-54' 0.0566 50 1.066 3.63 25.951 3.707 4.935 0.406 0.617 23.199 2.440 73.05 61.67 1177 1177 1.138 16.355 -0.946 0.633 5.062 0.965 38.2 14005200-68 0.0713 33 1.335 4.54 32.284 4.612 4.918 0.494 0.608 30.684 3.824 75.56 67.50 2365 2365 2.262 20.083 -0.932 0.625 5.043 0.966 46.7 14005200-68 0.0713 50 1.335 4.54 32.284 4.612 4.918 0.494 0.608 29.797 3.505 104.93 87.10 2365 2365 2.262 20.083 -0.932 0.625 5.043 0.966 37.9 1400S200.97 0.1017 33 1.881 6.40 44.853 6.408 4.883 0.655 0.590 44.683 5.917 116.93 111.87 6939 6939 6.484 27.156 -0.904 0.609 5.001 0.967 45.9 14005200-97 0.1017 50 1.881 6.40 44.853 6.408 4.883 0.655 0.590 43.616 5.580 167.07 146.98 6939 6939 6.484 27.156 -0.904 0.609 5.001 0.967 37.3 14005200-118 0.1242 33 2.276 7.75 53.698 7.671 4.857 0.755 0.576 53.698 7.480 147.81 146.71 12745 11287 11.704 31.861 -0.883 0.598 4.970 0.968 45.4 14005200-118 0.1242 50 2.276 7.75 53.698 7.671 4.857 0.755 0.576 53.520 7.096 212.47 195.62 12745 11287 11.704 31.861 -0.883 0.598 4.970 0.968 , 36.8 '14005250-54' 0.0566 33 1.122 3.82 28.702 4.100 5.057 0.707 0.794 26.758 2.927 57.83 52.08 1177 1177 1.198 27,675 -1.272 0,835 5.275 0.942 58.6 14005250.54' 0.0566 50 1.122 3.82 28.702 4.100 5.057 0.707 0.794 26.141 2.527 75.65 66.58 1177 1177 1.198 27.675 -1.272 0.835 5.275 0.942 47.8 14005250-68 0.0713 33 1.406 4.78 35.743 5.106 5.042 0.865 0.784 34.239 4.145 81.90 72.82 2365 2365 2.383 34.118 -1.257 0.827 5.255 0.943 58.3 'Web height -to -thickness ratio exceeds 200. Web stiffeners are required at all support points and concentrated loads. 'Allowable moment includes cold work of forming. See Tat,ie !Votes on page 7. Copyright MA. ci 1;1 RMJ VICTORIA'S SECRET SouthCenter Mall 241 Joaquin Ave. 303 SouthCenter Mall Space #100, Seatle WA San Leandro, CA 94577 Job No. 14184 Date: 5/16/2014 510.991.0977 By: mas Page: (0 HSS Steel Beam at Entry Maximum Length= 24.5 ft 294 in Maximum Moment=wx L2/8 = 7,503 ft-lb = 90,038 in -lb HSS 8x3x1/4" Beam See Enercalc Output File RMJ 8& ASSOCIATES 241 Joaquin Ave. San Leandro, CA 94577 and then using the "Printing & Title Block' selection. Title Block Line 6 Lic. # : KW-06000008 Description : Entry Beam CODE REFERENCES Project Title: VSS- SouthCenter Mall Engineer: mas Project Descr: Design Storefront m10UM11Er31 rFtorlas 3eo0141 • li RGAL, ING. tit Project ID: 14184 Printed:16 MAY 2014, 3:24PM 5oii etlter,WA)1 aICgF lcs 14 Etu-106.14.126 S/� 1412& Licensee : ROBINSON-MEIER-JUILLY AND ASSOCIATES Calculations per AISC 360-10, IBC 2012, ASCE 7-10 Load Combination Set : ASCE 7-10 Material Properties Analysis Method : Allowable Strength Design Beam Bracing : Beam bracing is defined as a set spacing over all spans Bending Axis : Major Axis Bending Load Combination ASCE 7-10 Unbraced Lengths First Brace starts at 4.0 ft from Left -Most support Regular spacing of lateral supports on length of beam = ft Applied Loads Beam self weight calculated and added to loads Uniform Load : D = 0.080, Lr = 0.020 kilt, DESIGN SUMMARY Maximum Bending Stress Ratio = Section used for this span Ma : Applied Mn / Omega : Allowable Load Combination Location of maximum on span Span # where maximum occurs Maximum Deflection Max Downward L+Lr+S Deflection Max Upward L+Lr+S Deflection Max Downward Total Deflection Max Upward Total Deflection D(0.08)Lr(0.02) Tributary Width = 1.0 ft, 0.365: 1 HSS8x3x1/4 8.800 k-ft 24.102 k-ft +D+Lr+H 12.250ft Span # 1 Fy : Steel Yield : E: Modulus : 42.0 ksi 29,000.0 ksi Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. (Dead + Live) Maximum Shear Stress Ratio = Section used for this span Va : Applied Vn/Omega : Allowable Load Combination Location of maximum on span Span # where maximum occurs 0.159 in Ratio = 0.000 in Ratio = 0.931 in Ratio = 0.000 in Ratio = Maximum forces &' Stresses for Load Combinations Load Combination Max Stress Ratios Segment Length Span # M V +D+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +D+L+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +D+Lr+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +D+S+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +D+0.750L+0.750S+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +D+0.60W+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +D+0.70E+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+0.450W+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.450W+H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 +0+0.750L+0.750S+0.5250E4I 0.303 0.303 0.365 0.303 0.350 0.303 0.303 0.303 0.350 0.303 0.023 0.023 0.028 0.023 0.027 0.023 0.023 0.023 0.027 0.023 1,851 0 <360 316 0 <180 Summary of Moment Values Mmax + 7.30 7.30 8.80 7.30 8.42 7.30 7.30 7.30 8.42 7.30 Mmax - Ma - Max Mnx Mnx/Omega Cb Rm 7.30 7.30 8.80 7.30 8.42 7.30 7.30 7.30 8.42 7.30 40.25 40.25 40.25 40.25 40.25 40.25 40.25 40.25 40.25 40.25 24.10 24.10 24.10 24.10 24.10 24.10 24.10 24.10 24.10 24.10 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 Design OK 0.028 : 1 HSS8x3x1/4 1.437 k 51.340 k +D+Lr+H 24.500 ft Span # 1 Summary of Shear Values Va Max Vnx Vnx/Omega 1.19 1.19 1.44 1.19 1.38 1.19 1.19 1.19 1.38 1.19 85.74 85.74 85.74 85.74 85.74 85.74 85.74 85.74 85.74 85.74 51.34 51.34 51.34 51.34 51.34 51.34 51.34 51.34 51.34 51.34 RMJ & ASSOCIATES 241 Joaquin Ave. San Leandro, CA 94577 and then using the Printing & Title Block" selection. Title Block Line 6 Steel Beam Lic. # : KW-06000008 Description : Entry Beam Load Combination Segment Length Span # Max Stress Ratios M V Project Title: VSS- SouthCenter Mall Engineer: mas Project Descr: Design Storefront 1 Project ID: 14184 Printed:16 MAY 2014, 3:24PM in; 1LIMITEOLV brlas'Segret114184( g0041 tern WA)\Calcsk;4u 1_€15RCALVIN.C.'t983401.4; f0i 6.1411.26 46.1 .1;26 Licensee : ROBINSON-MEIER-JUILLY AND ASSOCIATES Summary of Moment Values Mmax + Mmax - Ma - Max Mnx MnxlOmega Cb Rm Summary of Shear Values Va Max Vnx VnxlOmega Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 0.303 0.023 7.30 +0.60D+0.60W0.60H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 0.182 0.014 4.38 +0.60D+0.70E+0.60H Dsgn. L = 24.50 ft 1 0.182 0.014 4.38 Overall Maximum Deflections • Unfactored Loads Load Combination Span Max. ' " Deft 7.30 40.25 24.10 1.14 1.00 4.38 40.25 24.10 1.14 1.00 4.38 40.25 24.10 1.14 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination 1.19 0.72 0.72 85.74 51.34 85.74 51.34 85.74 51.34 Max. "+" Deft Location in Span D+Lr Vertical Reactions - Unfactored 1 0.9309 12.373 Support notation : Far left is #1 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Overall MAXimum Overall MINimum D Only Lr Only D+Lr 0.0000 0.000 Values in KIPS 1.437 0.245 1.192 0.245 1.437 1.437 0.245 1.192 0.245 1.437 RMJ VICTORIA'S SECRET SouthCenter Mall 241 Joaquin Ave. 303 SouthCenter Mall Space #100, Seatle WA San Leandro, CA 94577 Job No. 14184 Date: 5/16/2014 510.991.0977 By: mas Page: HSS Steel Beam at Display Maximum Length= 9.25 ft 111 in Maximum Moment=wx L2/8 = 1,070 ft-lb = 12,834 in -lb HSS 6x3x1/4 Beam See Enercalc Output File RMJ &ASSOCIATES 241 Joaquin Ave. San Leandro, CA 94577 and then using the Printing & Title Block" selection. Title Block Line 6 Steel" Description : Display Beam CODE REFERENCES Calculations per AISC 360-10, IBC 2012, ASCE 7-10 Load Combination Set : ASCE 7-10 Material Properties Analysis Method : Allowable Strength Design Beam Bracing : Beam bracing is defined as a set spacing over all spans Bending Axis : Major Axis Bending Load Combination ASCE 7-10 Unbraced:Lengths First Brace starts at 4.0 ft from Left -Most support Regular spacing of lateral supports on length of beam = 0.0 ft Applied Loads Beam self weight calculated and added to loads Uniform Load : D = 0.080, Lr = 0.020 k/ft, Tributa DESIGN SUMMARY Maximum Bending Stress Ratio = Section used for this span Ma : Applied Mn / Omega : Allowable Load Combination Location of maximum on span Span # where maximum occurs Maximum Deflection Max Downward L+Lr+S Deflection Max Upward L+Lr+S Deflection Max Downward Total Deflection Max Upward Total Deflection Project Title: VSS- SouthCenter Mall Engineer: mas Project Descr: Design Storefront Curti 4 Project ID: 14184 Printed:16 MAY 2014, 3:24PM ► Cal 1c ?6 Ve i Licensee : ROBINSON-MEIER-JUILLY AND ASSOCIATES Fy : Steel Yield : E: Modulus : 42.0 ksi 29,000.0 ksi Service Toads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Width = 1.0 ft, (Dead + Live) 0.081:...1_.... HSS6x3x1/4 1.218 k-ft 15.069 k-ft +D+Lr+H 4.625ft Span # 1 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio = Section used for this span Va : Applied Vn/Omega : Allowable Load Combination Location of maximum on span Span # where maximum occurs 0.007 in Ratio = 0.000 in Ratio = 0.038 in Ratio = 0.000 in Ratio = ium 'orces4 Stresses for Load Combinations Load Combination Max Stress Ratios Segment Length Span # M V 16,478 0 <360 2894 0 <180 Summary of Moment Values Mmax + Mmax - Ma - Max Mnx Mnx/Omega Cb Rm Design OK 0.014 : 1 HSS6x3x1/4 0.5267 k 37.276 k +D+Lr+H 9.250 ft Span # 1 Summary of Shear Values Va Max Vnx Vnx/Omega +D+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+L+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+Lr+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+S+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+0.750L+0.750S+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+0.60W+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+0.70E+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+0.450W+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.450W+H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.5250E+H 0.067 0.067 0.081 0.067 0.077 0.067 0.067 0.067 0.077 0.067 0.012 0.012 0.014 0.012 0.014 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.014 0.012 1.00 1.00 1.22 1.00 1.16 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.16 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.22 1.00 1.16 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.16 1.00 25.17 25.17 25.17 25.17 25.17 25.17 25.17 25.17 25.17 25.17 15.07 15.07 15.07 15.07 15.07 15.07 15.07 15.07 15.07 15.07 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.43 0.43 0.53 0.43 0.50 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.50 0.43 62.25 62.25 62.25 62.25 62.25 62.25 62.25 62.25 62.25 62.25 37.28 37.28 37.28 37.28 37.28 37.28 37.28 37.28 37.28 37.28 RMJ & ASSOCIATES 241 Joaquin Ave. San Leandro, CA 94577 and then using the 'Printing & Title Block' selection. Title Block Line 6 Description : Display Beam Project Title: VSS- SouthCenter Mall Engineer: mas Project ID: 14184 Project Descr: Design Storefront Printed: 16 MAY 2014, 3:24PM =file `1J $ ***4e6t)tCalcs 3914;0410:fVer:t�18 ., Licensee : ROBINSON-MEIER-JUILLY AND ASSOCIATES f41 Load Combination Max Stress Ratios Summary of Moment Values Summary of Shear Values Segment Length Span # M V Mmax + Mmax - Ma - Max Mnx Mnx/Omega Cb Rm Va Max Vnx Vnx/Omega Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft 1 0.067 0.012 1.00 1.00 25.17 15.07 1.14 1.00 0.43 62.25 37.28 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft 1 0.040 0.007 0.60 0.60 25.17 15.07 1.14 1.00 0.26 62.25 37.28 +0.60D+0.70E+0.60H Dsgn. L = 9.25 ft 1 0.040 0.007 0.60 0.60 25.17 15.07 1.14 1.00 0.26 62.25 37.28 Overall Maximum Deflections - Unfactored Loads Load Combination Span Max. ' ' Defl Location in Span Load Combination Max. "+" Defl Location in Span D+Lr 1 0.0384 4.671 0.0000 0.000 Vertical Reactions Unfactored Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Overall MAXimum 0.527 0.527 Overall MlNimum 0.093 0.093 D Only 0.434 0.434 Lr Only 0.093 0.093 D+Lr 0.527 0.527 Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS RMJ VICTORIA'S SECRET SouthCenter Mall 241 Joaquin Ave. 303 SouthCenter Mall Space #100, Seatle WA San Leandro, CA 94577 Job No. 14184 Date: 5/16/2014 510.991.0977 By: mas Page: Lateral Loads on Storefront Lateral loads on storefront shall be based on maximum of: -Lott. 2909 International Building Code Section 1607.13, 5 psf In some cases, a conservative load, based on a higher seimic force may be used. Max storefront ht. = 15.00 ft w=5 psf x .5 x . 7.50 ft OR = 18.8 plf w= 35.5 plf (See following sheet for determination of seismic loads) Use w= 35.5 plf for loads perpendicular to storefront. Use w= 35.5 plf for loads parallel to storefront. RMJ VICTORIA'S SECRET SouthCenter Mall 241 Joaquin Ave. 303 SouthCenter Mall Space #100, Seatle WA San Leandro, CA 94577 Job No. 14184 Date: 5/16/2014 510.991.0977 By: mas Page: Na; Lateral Force on Elements (ASCE Code Section 9.6.1.3) ap= 1.0 Rp= 2.5 Ip= 1.0 Sds= 1.0 Sms= 1.5 Ss = 1.5 Fa= 1.0 z= 1.0 h= 2.0 Fp= (0.4*ap*Sds)/(Rp*Ip)*(1+2*(z/h))*V\ 0.311 Wp Fp shall not be less than 0.7CaIpWp and need not be greater than 4CalpWp Fp= 0.3*Sds*Ip*Wp= 0.292 Wp Fp= 1.6*Sds*Ip*Wp= 1.555 Wp Fp= 0.311 Wp/1.4 Wp= 160 plf Fp= 35.5 plf RMJ VICTORIA'S SECRET SouthCenter Mall 241 Joaquin Ave. 303 SouthCenter Mall Space #100, Seatle WA San Leandro, CA 94577 Job No. 14184 Date: Date: 5/16/2014 510.991.0977 By: mas Page: Page: Full Height HSS Steel Columns (resists loads parallel to storefront) Maximum Height= 18 ft 216 in (strong axis) Height of Box Beam= 12 ft 144 in (weak axis) Pmax= 80 plf x 24.5 ft/2 PmaX 980 Ibs Storefront Length = 66 ft Number of Full Height Columns = 2 See Enercalc Output File v • Vmax 35.5 pif x 66 ft / 2 = 1,173 Ibs Mmax 1173.1 Ibsx 12ftx6ft/ 18 ft = 56,307 in-Ibs 4.69 k-ft +D+Lr+H +D+S+H +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+H +D+0.750L+0.750S+H +D+0.60W+H +D+0.70E+H +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+0.450W+H +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.450W+H +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.5250E+H +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H +0.60D+0.70E+0.60H Maximum Reactions - Unfactored Load Combination RMJ & ASSOCIATES 241 Joaquin Ave. San Leandro, CA 94577 and then using the 'Printing & Title Block" selection. Title Block Line 6 Steel Column Description : Full ht. Column Code References Project Title: VSS- SouthCenter Mall Engineer: mas Project Descr: Design Storefront Project ID: 14184 Printed: 16 MAY 2014, 3:26PM EI)1Vic& 1es $ecrefs14184(Southcen10 INA)1 skaks ec6 ENI*RCAL tNc 1983-2014 Buik(.6 t4..t 2( 'Ver.6.t41.26.: Licensee : ROBINSON-MEIER-JUILLY AND ASSOCIATES Calculations per AISC 360-10, IBC 2012, CBC 2013, ASCE 7-10 Load Combinations Used : ASCE 7-10 General Information Steel Section Name : Analysis Method : Steel Stress Grade Fy : Steel Yield E : Elastic Bending Modulus Load Combination : HSS3x3x1/4 Allowable Strength 42.0 ksi 29,000.0 ksi ASCE 7-10 Applied Loads Column self weight included : 158.004 lbs * Dead Load Factor BENDING LOADS... EQ: Moment acting about X-X axis, E = 4.690 k-ft DESIGN SUMMARY Bending & Shear Check Results PASS Max. Axial+Bending Stress Ratio = Load Combination Location of max.above base At maximum location values are ... Pa : Axial Pn / Omega : Allowable Ma-x : Applied Mn-x / Omega : Allowable Ma-y : Applied Mn-y I Omega : Allowable PASS Maximum Shear Stress Ratio = Load Combination Location of max.above base At maximum location values are Va : Applied Vn / Omega : Allowable Load CombinationResults Overall Column Height 18.0 ft Top & Bottom Fixity Top & Bottom Pinned Brace condition for deflection (buckling) along columns : X-X (width) axis : Unbraced Length for X-X Axis buckling = 18.0 ft, K = 1.0 Y-Y (depth) axis : Fully braced against buckling along Y-Y Axis 0.4278 :1 +D+0.70E+H 11.960 ft 0.1580 k 9.685 k 2.181 k-ft 5.198 k-ft 0.0 k-ft 5.198 k-ft 0.01127 :1 +D+0.70E+H 0.0 ft 0.1824 k 16.180 k Maximum Axial + Bending Stress Ratios Load Combination Stress Ratio Status Location +D+H 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.428 0.016 0.016 0.323 0.010 0.425 PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS X-X Axis Reaction @ Base @ Top 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 11.96ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 11.96ft 0.00 ft 11.96ft Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Maximum SERVICE Load Reactions.. Top along X-X Bottom along X-X Top along Y-Y Bottom along Y-Y Maximum SERVICE Load Deflections ... Along Y-Y 1.058 in at for load combination :E Only Along X-X 0.0 in at for load combination : Maximum Stress Ratio 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.011 0.000 0.000 0.008 0.000 0.011 Y-Y Axis Reaction @ Base @ Top 0.0 k 0.0 k 0.2606 k 0.2606 k 8.577ft above base Shear Ratios Status Location PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS 0.0ft above base 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft 0.00 ft Note: Only non -zero reactions are listed. Axial Reaction © Base E Only k -0.261 -0.261 k k RMJ & ASSOCIATES 241 Joaquin Ave. San Leandro, CA 94577 and then using the 'Printing & Title Block" selection. Title Block Line 6 Description : Full ht. Column Maximum Deflections for Load Combinations - Unfactored Loads Load Combination Max. X-X Deflection Distance Project Title: VSS- SouthCenter Mall(40 Engineer: mas Project ID: 14184 Project Descr: Design Storefront Printed:16 MAY 2014, 3:26PM Licensee : ROBINSON-MEIER-JUILLY AND ASSOCIATES Max. Y-Y Deflection Distance E Only 0.0000 in Steel Section Properties HSS3x3x114 0.000 ft 1.058 in 8.577 ft Depth = 3.000 in I xx = 3.02 in^4 J = 5.080 in"4 S xx = 2.01 in"3 Width = 3.000 in R xx = 1.110 in Wall Thick = 0.250 in Zx = 2.480 in9 Area = 2.440 inA2 1 yy = 3.020 in"4 C = 3.520 i103 Weight = 8.778 pif S yy = 2.010 in"3 Ryy = 1.110 in Ycg 0.000 in X ."au CO0 Loads are total entered value. Arrows do not reflect absolute direction. RMJ VICTORIA'S SECRET SouthCenter Mall 241 Joaquin Ave. 303 SouthCenter Mall Space #100, Seatle WA San Leandro, CA 94577 Job No. 14184 Date: 5/16/2014 510.991.0977 By: mas Page: 11- Diagonal Braces Used to resist Toads perpendicular to the storefront. P= 35.547429 pif x 4'-0"o.c. 0 = 45 degrees diagonal bra Pmax= 201.1 Ibs Attachment above Height = 22.50 ft Bott. Of Diag Brace = 16.0 ft Attachment Height brace= (roof height-diag. brace bott. height)/sin 0 = 9.2 ft = 110.3 in bott of diag. brace Length of brace based on angle and difference in height between roof and connection to section Use 362S162-33 BRACE at 4'-0" o.c. Good for 744 Ibs (See following Prop 86 print-out) Pmax= 201.1 <Pcap 744 Ibs Copyright (C) - SURE -TIE, INC. - 1992-98, All Rights Reserved. 362S 162-33 (e DIMENSIONS / PHYSICAL PROPERTIES : Web (A' ) = 3.625 in. Punchout = 1.500 in. (abar) = 3.590 in. Spacing = 24.000 in. (a ) = 3.403 in. Type = CONFORMING Flanges (B' ) = 1.625, 1.625 in. Thickness = 0.0346 in. (bbar) = 1.590, 1.590 in. h/t Web = 98.4 (b ) = 1.403, 1.403 in. w/t Flanges = 40.5, 40.5 Lip (C' ) = 0.500 in. Bearing Width = 1.500 in. (cbar) = 0.483 in. (c ) = 0.389 in. Radius (R ) = 0.0764 in. (r ) = 0.0937 in. (u ) = 0.1471 in. KLX = 111.00 in. Fy = 33.000 ksi Fya-AXIAL = 33.000 ksi Fya-BEND = 33.000 ksi KLY = 111.00 in. Fu = 45.000 ksi Fu/Fy = 1.364 KLT = 111.00 in. E = 29,500 ksi KLB = 111.00 in. Net/Gross Section Used for Capacity = NET G = 11,300 ksi WALLBOARD PARAMETERS : Stud Spacing = 16.00 in. q-bar-o = 0.000 ksi Gamma = 0.000 in./in. DEFLECTION LIMIT / MOMENT COEFFICIENTS : Deflection = U240 Cmx = 1.000 Cmy = 1.000 Ey = 0.000 in. Fastener Spacing = 12.00 in. Ex = 0.000 in. GROSS / NET SECTION PROPERTIES BASED ON 1986 AISI SPECIFICATIONS Area Gross = 0.262 inA2 Ix Gross = 0.551 inA4 Ix Net = 0.542 inA4 ly Gross = 0.099 inA4 ly Net = 0.082 inA4 m = 0.815 in. Bw = - 0.0868 in^5 ro = 2.065 in. Area Net = 0.210 inA2 Sx Gross = 0.304 inA3 Sx Net =. 0.299 in^3 Sy Gross = 0.090 in^3 Sy Net = 0.074 in^3 J = 0.000105 inA4 Bf = 0.1192 in^5 Beta = 0.582 Rx Gross = 1.450 in. x-bar = 0.520 in. Rx Net = 1.605 in. Ry Gross = 0.616 in. y-bar = 1.813 in. Ry Net = 0.624 in. xo = -1.334 in. Cw BI = 0.1281 in^5 j = 0.2927 in^6 = 2.1425 in. lxx/lyy Required = 0.000/ 0.000 inA4 ALLOWABLE LOADS Lateral Loads (X/Y) = 0.00/ 0.00 I Overall Nominal Failure Load = 1,429 lbs. Overall Allowable Axial Load = 744 lbs. Omega = 1.9; Nominal Y Axis Moment Capacity = 2,640 in-Ibs Allowable Y Axis Moment Capacity = 2,108 in-Ibs Omec Nominal Cap. (Web in Tension) = 2,814 in-Ibs Allowable Cap. (Web in Tension) = 2,246 in-Ibs lyy Effective at Comp. Yield = 0.070 inA4 Min. Syy Effective at Comp. Yield = 0.080 in^3 Min. Nominal X-Axis Moment Capacity = 4,360 in-Ibs Allowable X-Axis Moment Capacity = 3,481 in-Ibs Ome Ixx Effective at Comp. Yield = 0.538 inA4 Sxx Effective at Comp. Yield = 0.293 in^3 Allow. Load Considering Lat. Load (Comp/Tension) = 744/ 5,538 Ibs. Lat. Load Moments (X/Y) = 0/ 0 Allowable Shear Load on Unreinforced Web = Allowable End One -Flange Loading Reaction = Ixx for Deflection Determination = 0.551 inA4 - Iyy for Deflection Determination = 0.070 inA4 - 554 Ibs. > Actual Shear Load = 0 Ibs. 206 Ibs. > Actual End Reaction = 0 Ibs. at Current Stress Level in Section of 2,840 psi at Maximum Stress Level in Section of 33,000 psi PROP86, Version 5.00 - RMJ & ASSOCIATES Printed On 05-16-2014 at 15:29:38 Page 1 Design Maps Summary Report http://ehp2-earthquake.wr.usgs.gov/designmaps/us/summary... MUMS Design Maps Summary Report User -Specified Input Report Title VSS-SouthCenter Fri May 16, 2014 22:12:30 UTC Building Code Reference Document ASCE 7-10 Standard (which utilizes USGS hazard data available in 2008) Site Coordinates 47.459°N, 122.261°W Site Soil Classification Site Class D - "Stiff Soil" Risk Category I/II/III USGS-Provided Output SS = 1.458 g Sl = 0.544 g SMS = 1.458 g S = 0.816 g Sos = 0.972 g SDI = 0.544 g For information on how the SS and S1 values above have been calculated from probabilistic (risk -targeted) and deterministic ground motions in the direction of maximum horizontal response, please return to the application and select the "2009 NEHRP" building code reference document. 1.85 1.50 1.35 1.20 1.05 ✓ 0.90 0.75 0.G0 0.45 0.30 0.15 0.00 MCER Response Spectrum 1.10 1.00 0.50 0.20 0.70 0 0.G0 0.50 0.40 0.30 0.20 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.20 0.40 0 G0 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.G0 1.00 2.00 0.00 0.20 0.40 O.GO 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.80 1.80 2.00 Design Response Spectrum Period, T (sec) For PGAM, TL, CRS, and CR1 values, please view the detailed report. Period, T (sec) 1 of 2 5/16/2014 3:14 PM PILE COPY PPr+++rx.. • _ • VICTORIA'S SECRET 010500230 - Southcenter Mall 303 Southcenter Space #100 Seattle, WA 98188 Architectural Specifications ISSUED: 05/18/2014 REVISIONS: Required By: n FITCH Fitch 16435 N. Scottsdale Rd. Suite 195 Scottsdale, AZ 85254 480.998.4200 REVIEWED F CODE COMPLI:R PROVED CE JUL 2 4 2014 City of BUILDING ru /la DIVISION Date n A n RECEIVED CITY of TUKWILA 0 JUN 10 2014 A A A PERMIT CENTER 1-1-013 Li (niter LIMITED STORE PLANNING. INC d/b/a STORE DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION PRONIBRION ON REUSE: THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED FOR USE ON A SPECIFIC SITE CONTEMPORANEOUSLY WITH THEIR ISSUE DATE THEY ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON A DIFFERENT PROJECT SITE OR AT A LATER • TIME REUSE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, OR ANY REPRODUCTION THEREOF, ON ANOTHER PROJECT IS PROHIBITED AND CONTRARY TO LAW UNLESS EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRFRNO BY UNITED STORE PLANNING. INC.. DLWA UNITED STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION I'LSDCI. THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF LSDC AND SHALL NOT BE DISPLAYED IN ANY MANNER OR USED ON ANY OTHER PROJECT EXCEPT BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LSDC. NO REPRODUCTION OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE LSDC. ALL ORIGINALS OR REPRODUCTIONS OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MUST BE RETURNED TO LSDC UPON COMPLETION OF THEIR INTENDED USE. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED BY THE LSDC. COPYRIGHT NOTICE: THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE COPYRIGHTED AND SUBJECT TO COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AS AN 'ARCHITECTURAL WORK' UNDER SEC. 102 OF THE COPYRIGHT ACT. 17 U.S.C. AS AMENDED DECEMBER 1990: KNOWN AS THE ARCHITECTURAL WORKS COPYRIGHT PROTECTION ACT OF 1990. THE PROTECTION INCLUDES, WRHDIT UMTATION, THE OVERALL FORM, ARRANGEMENT AND COMPOSITION OF SPACES. AND ELEMENTS OF THE DESIGN. UNDER SUCH PROTECTION. UNAUTHORIZED LOSE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY RESULT IN CESSATION OF CONSTRUCTION, BUILDING SEIZURE, AND/OR MONETARY UABIUTY. LSD&C Project #: 00061087 A/E Project #: 320102755 Version: 142Fa.01 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 TABLE OF CONTENTS AL\L A0L DIVISION 00: PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 007200 GENERAL CONDITIONS 007300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016200 PRODUCT OPTIONS 017000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED) DIVISION 03: CONCRETE 033000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 034900 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CEMENT 039250 CONCRETE RESURFACING AND REHABILITATION DIVISION 04: MASONRY 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 044000 STONE ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 05: METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 057000 DECORATIVE METAL DIVISION 06: WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 064000 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 061600 SHEATHING Table of Contents 02 — TABLE OF CONTENTS VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071416 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072400 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) 075900 ROOF REPAIRS 076000 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078400 FIRE STOPPING 079200 JOINT SEALANT 079513 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 08: OPENINGS 081000 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081400 WOOD DOORS 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 083100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 083326 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 083516 FOLDING GRILLES 084113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 085200 WOOD WINDOWS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088100 GLASS GLAZING 088300 MIRRORS DIVISION 09: FINISHES 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092950 GYPSUM BOARD METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 093000 TILING 095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095323 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING 096429 WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096800 CARPETING Table of Contents 03 — TABLE OF CONTENTS VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 097202 WALL COVERING ADHESIVES 097216 VINYL -COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING 097216.16 RIGID SHEET VINYL WALL COVERINGS (F.R.P. PANELS) 098100 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 099000 PAINTING AND COATING DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102613 CORNER GUARDS 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 105100 LOCKERS 105626 MOBILE/FIXED STORAGE SHELVING 107313 AWNINGS DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 124813 WALK -OFF MATS AND FRAMES DIVISION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14: CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 15 THRU 20: RESERVED DIVISION 21: FIRE SUPPRESSION (REFER TO SPRINKLER DRAWINGS) DIVISION 22: PLUMBING (REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS) DIVISION 23: HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS) DIVISION 24: RESERVED DIVISION 25: INTEGRATED AUTOMATION DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL (REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) DIVISION 27: COMMUNICATIONS (REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) DIVISION 28: ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY DIVISION 29: RESERVED DIVISION 30 THRU 39: SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE (NOT USED) DIVISION 40 THRU 49: PROCESS EQUIPMENT (INDUSTRIAL) (NOT USED) Table of Contents 04 — TABLE OF CONTENTS VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 DIVISION 00: PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 007200 - GENERAL CONDITIONS A. General conditions: Owner's standard general conditions for construction are incorporated into the controlling contract for construction. 1. A copy will be made available by owner upon request. SECTION 007300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS A. Conditions and requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements contain information necessary for completion of every part of project. B. Division 1: Where provisions of General Conditions relate to project administration or Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 work -related requirements of the contract, those paragraphs are expanded in Division 1. C. Miscellaneous definitions: 1. Approved: Requires written action by owner's project manager as does terms such as directed, selected, required, ordered, designated, accepted, acceptable, and satisfactory. 2. Fumish: Supply and deliver to project, unless otherwise stated in greater detail. 3. Install: Operations at project, from inspecting and unloading, to completion in place, ready for intended use. 4. Provide: Fumish and install, complete and ready for intended use, unless otherwise stated in greater detail. END OF DIVISION 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 02 — DIV00 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011000 — SUMMARY A. Project consists of construction of the limited brands store as indicated in contract documents. 1. Items noted "NIC" (not in contract) will be furnished and installed by owner or under separate contract 2. Hazardous materials: not in contract; owner will provide for handling of hazardous materials under separate contract prior to this project. If hazardous materials are suspected, notify owner immediately. B. Work sequence: coordinate construction schedule, operations and use of premises with building management. C. Contractor use of premises: limit to areas indicated on drawings and as specified; limit access as directed by owner. D. Lines and levels engineering: establish lines and levels by use of recognized engineering practices. Locate and protect control and reference points. E. Regulatory requirements: project has been designed in accordance with applicable codes. Comply with code requirements for construction. Inform owner's project manager of discrepancies observed or noted by others. F. Standards: comply with standards referenced except where more rigid requirements are required by code. Date of standard is that in effect as of date documents are issued, except when specific date is specified. G. Owner furnished contractor installed items: owner will arrange and pay for product as indicated on dwgs to be delivered to project site for contractor installation. 1. Contractor shall inspect, receive, unload, store, install and finish. SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Procedures: contractor shall review and approve submittals prior to submitting to owner's project manager. Inform owners pm in writing at time of submission of any proposed deviation from contract documents. 1. Review of submittals by owner's project manager shall be for design concept only and shall not be construed as approving departures from contract documents. B. Construction progress schedule: bar charts or contractor's standard computerized schedules, updated regularly, no less than monthly. C. Schedule of values: AIA form G703 or approved format. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 D. Shop drawings: submit one reproducible and two prints; provide for custom products and products not fully identified by product data. E. Product data: submit number required by contractor plus two for owner's project manager; indicate item to be used where data for more than one product or option is included; provide for each stock manufactured item. F. Samples: provide samples for each type of exposed finish, color, and texture; minimum size 6", maximum size 12" unless otherwise specified; submit one sample for owner's project manager to retain, one sample for field office, and number required by contractor. G. Manufacturer's certificates: provide two. H. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work; conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas; coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finishes. 1. Make provisions for owner installed items and for separate contracts. 2. Verify characteristics of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; 3. Coordinate work having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connection to, and placing of such equipment in service. I. Project meetings: schedule and administer meetings, make physical arrangement, prepare agenda, preside at meetings and record minutes. SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. General quality control: Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. Manufacturer's field services: When specified in respective specification sections, require manufacturer or supplier to have qualified personnel provide on -site observations and recommendations. 1. Representative shall: a. Observe field conditions, including conditions of surfaces. Observe quality of workmanship and methods of installation. b. Provide recommendations for installation and workmanship. c. Where required, start, test, and adjust equipment as applicable. d. Submit written report to owner's pm of observations. C. Mock-ups: Construct field samples and mock-ups on site as required. D. Testing laboratory services: Testing shall be by an approved testing laboratory, as required by specifications and by applicable codes. General Requirements 01 — DIV01 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: 010500230 1. Testing required will be paid for by owner except retesting will be paid for by contractor where required by failure to meet original tests. 2. Contractor shall fumish materials and samples for tests and shall assist testing laboratory as requested. SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. General: provide temporary construction facilities and temporary controls as required to complete project in accordance with contract documents and to conform to requirements of applicable authorities. 1. Contract governing authorities to establish extent of temporary facilities and temporary controls required by authorities. B. Temporary power: provide power service and lighting required for operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located to allow service and lighting by means of construction - type power cords. C. Temporary water and sanitary services: provide and maintain required drinking water and sanitary facilities with enclosures. D. Noise, dust, and pollution control: provide materials and equipment necessary to comply with local requirements for noise, dust, and pollution control. E. Barriers: provide as required to protect adjacent properties from damage from operations; and as required by goveming authorities. 1. Solid wood construction fence; equip with gates with locks. 2. Security: maintain site and materials secure during construction period. F. Cleaning: control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; dispose of off -site at intervals approved by owner's project manager and acceptable to applicable authorities. G. Field office: provide weather -tight field office, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, and ventilating equipment, and equipped with furniture. 1. Telephone service: provide telephone service and fax service to site during on -site construction operations. 2. Telephone service: provide cellular phone with on -site person in charge; provide phone number to owner's project manager. H. Storage: limit on -site storage to areas designated for construction operations and approved in writing in advance by owner; provide additional weather -tight, secured off -site storage as required. I. Removal and cleaning: remove construction facilities, clean and repair damage in excess of contract requirements, caused by operations or use of temporary facilities. SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Contract amount: Base on materials and products in contract documents; where listed in contract documents, materials and products by manufacturers not listed shall not be used without written approval. B. Products: Components supplied in quantity shall be interchangeable; provide new materials unless otherwise directed in contract documents. C. Installation: install items plumb, level and secure, and in correct relation to adjacent products; secure in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. 1. Comply with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions except where more stringent requirements are specified. D. Transportation: transport products to avoid product damage, deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging. E. Handling: provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling and damage; promptly inspect to assure products are correct, complete, and undamaged, and quantities are correct. F. Storage: store material in accordance with manufacturer instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. G. Protection: provide coverings to protect products from damage from traffic and construction operations, remove when no longer needed. H. Specified products: for products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers, select products of any named manufacturer meeting specifications. SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Substitutions and product options: provide products indicated or approved; requests for substitutions of other products will be considered if submitted in writing. 1. Contractor options: provide products and manufacturers named in specifications, submit request for substitution for products and manufacturers not specifically named where names are listed. 2. Substitutions: contractor shall investigate proposed substitutions and determine if equivalent to products specified. Submittals General Requirements 02 — DIV01 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 shall include cost or time benefits for substitutions; failure to indicate cost or time benefit is justification for rejection. 3. Contractor's representation: requests constitute that contractor has investigated proposed products and determines it meets or exceeds specified products and waives claims for additional costs that subsequently become apparent. 4. Approvals: owner's project manager shall be judge of acceptability and reserves right to reject proposed substitution based on insufficient information; use only substitutions approved in writing. SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Installer qualifications: installers to have minimum five years successful experience installing items similar to those required for project, except for individuals in training under direct supervision of experienced installer. B. Examination: beginning installation of a product signifies installer has examined substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with manufacturer requirements for tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. C. Manufacturer's instructions: when work is specified to comply with manufacturers' recommendations or instructions, distribute copies to persons involved, and maintain one set in field office. D. Installation: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations and installation instructions unless more restrictive requirements are specified. E. Protection: cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet, provide ventilation to avoid condensation and trapping water. F. Cutting and patching: cut and fit components as required; patch disturbed areas to match adjacent materials and finishes. 1. Refinishing: refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection, for an assembly refinish entire unit. G. Final cleaning: clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, remove temporary labels, stains, and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces; clean ducts; clean site. H. Substantial completion: provide documentation stating work has been substantially completed. Where owner requires use of space prior to final completion, provide list of items to be completed. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 1. Owner's project manager will review list of any items to be completed and supplement list with items considered to be incomplete or unacceptable. I. Final completion: provide written certification indicating work is in compliance with contract documents, systems have been tested and are operational, and work is ready for final inspection. J. Project record documents: maintain complete and up-to-date record documents; keep separate from field documents. Submit project record documents, material and finish data, operation and instruction manuals, warranties and bonds at completion. 1. Submit bound in 8-1/2" x 11" three ring binders with durable plastic covers. Arrange in format similar to specifications. K. Warranties: provide warranties as indicated, signed by contractor and manufacturer; form as approved by owner prior to execution. 1. Warranties shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights owner may have against contractor under contract documents and as prescribed by law, regardless of wording of warranty. SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION A. Selective demolition: remove from site existing materials, construction and utilities as needed to complete project. Remove existing elements indicated and encountered during construction, as needed to complete work. 1. Remove only those elements necessary for completion of project, replace or repair elements unnecessarily removed or damaged during construction. 2. Carefully remove and store items indicated for reuse in project and coordinate with other trades for modifications and reinstallation. 3. Protection: prevent movement and settlement of adjacent structure; provide bracing, shoring, and underpinning as needed and be responsible for safety and support of structures. Assume liability for such movement and settlement. 4. Utilities: contact applicable utility companies prior to disconnecting utilities; discontinue work if unexpected utility lines are encountered. Determine line source and use prior to removal. Cap and identify existing utility lines removed. General Requirements 03 — DIV01 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Store #: 010500230 Version: 142Fa.01 SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND free of deficiencies, in most efficient and timely manner achievable. TRAINING A. Summary: project includes special facility start-up process to bring facility to fully operational state, DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED) END OF DIVISION 02 END OF DIVISION 01 General Requirements 04 — DIV01 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: 010500230 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 033000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 28 days, with a water cement ratio = .50 (maximum). Concrete exposed to weather shall be air -entrained at 6% ± 1.5% B. All reinforcing steel shall be new domestic deformed billet steel conforming to ASTM a-615 grade 60. C. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM a-185 delivered in flat sheets. D. All concrete work shall be in accordance with "the building code requirements for reinforced concrete" ACI 318-05. E. All reinforcing details shall conform to "manual of standard practice for detailing reinforced concrete structures" ACI 315-94, unless detailed otherwise on the structural drawings. F. Contractor shall verify locations of all openings, sleeves, anchor bolts, inserts, etc., as required by other trades before concrete is placed. G. Contractor shall provide spacers, chairs, bolsters, etc., necessary to support reinforcing steel. chairs which bear on exposed concrete surfaces shall have ends which are plastic tipped or stainless steel. chairs which bear on exposed concrete surfaces to receive sandblast finish shall be stainless steel. H. The following minimum concrete cover shall be provided for reinforcement: (refer to the structural drawings specifications). SECTION 034900 - GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CEMENT A. General: polymer glass fiber reinforced gray cement - Formglas EP (for exterior and high traffic application) 1. Work included: a. Supply of Formglas EP units. b. Erection per architects' drawings, manufacturers' instructions and in compliance with local codes. c. Supply of connection hardware. 2. Related work excluded: a. Pre -cast concrete. b. Structural framing and back up. c. Finishes - note: Formglas EP is available in natural (cement) grey color only and requires field finishing. d. Caulking. 3. Design responsibility: Formglas EP is to be considered a decorative material only. Formglas cannot take responsibility for structural load (live or wind) or seismic considerations. 4. Manufacturer: Formglas Inc., 2 champagne drive, Toronto, Ontario Canada m3j 2c5 tel: (416) 635-8030 fax: (416) 635-6588 intemet: www.fomiglas.com 5. Samples and submittals: a. Submit a minimum of 3 - 8" x 8" Formglas EP flat samples to the finishing contractor for coating selection. b. Submit shop drawings for approval showing plans, sections, details, joint - treatment, reinforcing, fastening devices and the relation of the Formglas EP to the surrounding construction. 6. Substitutions: no substitutions. B. Products: 1. Materials: a. Formglas EP units shall be prefabricated with polymer glassfibre reinforced cement (P.G.R.C.) suitably reinforced. b. Formglas EP shall be ready to receive finish coatings as specified elsewhere. These coatings shall be applied after units are installed. c. All fasteners or connectors shall be galvanized or plated. d. Note: Formglas EP is supplied in natural (cement) grey color only and requires field finishing by others. 2. Tolerances (Fabrication): a. Dimensional all directions +/- 1/8" b. Thickness skin +/- 1/8" - 1/16" c. Thickness - total unit +/- 1/4" — 1/8" d. Warpage or bowing +/- 1/16" per foot 3. Physical properties: a. Shell thickness 3/16" to 3/8" b. Weight (depending on reinforcing) 2'/: to6lbs/sq.ft. c. Density approx. 125 Ibs/cu.ft. d. Ultimate tensile strength 1300 P.S.I e. Bending strength 2600 P.S.I f. Compressive strength 8000 P.S.I g. Shear strength (interlaminar) 650 P.S.I h. Fuel contributed (A.S.T.M. e84-80) 5 i. Flame and smoke spread (A.S.T.M. e84-80) 0 C. Execution: 1. Delivery, storage and handling: transport and handle units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses or damage and store on a level and clean surface. 2. Pre -installation responsibilities: a. Prior to manufacturing, dimensions and conditions not shown on the drawings will be checked by the erector for inclusion by the manufacturer. Concrete 01 — DIVO3 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: 010500230 b. Prior to installation, the erector shall check jobsite dimensions. Any discrepancies between design and field dimensions shall be brought to the attention of the general contractor. Work shall not proceed until these discrepancies are corrected. 3. Erection: a. Units shall be lifted with suitable devices at points indicated by the manufacturer. b. Installation of units shall be plumb and level. c. The erector shall provide temporary supports to maintain position as units are being connected. d. Fasten units with screws (through the face or from the back). 4. Tolerances - erected units: a. Width of caulked joint +/- 3/16" b. Out of plane (unit to unit) +/- 1/4" c. Warpage or bowing +/- 1/16" per foot. 5. Joint treatment & patching: a. Apply bondo at all joints. Note: in areas not subject to freeze/thaw conditions it is possible to tape column cover joints with auto body filler and fibreglass tape. Contact Formglas for further information. b. To patch chips, breaks, countersunk fasteners, etc., use auto body filler or cement patching compound as recommended by Formglas. 6. Cleaning & finishing: a. Clean soiled units with detergent and water. Formglas EP is available only in natural (cement) grey color and requires field finishing. Finishes used, shall be the same as for concrete tilt -up materials and are shown under the painting section of the specifications. D. Warranty: Formglas EP is warranted for one (1) year from the date of acceptance to remain free from cracks, chips, spills and marks caused by defective material or workmanship. SECTION 039250 - CONCRETE RESURFACING AND REHABILITATION A. General: concrete surface shall be improved and/or repaired to provide a suitable surface for installation of all floor finish materials and to comply with all project and/or fixture requirements. B. Submittals: 1. No submittals shall be required. 2. No substitutions will be allowed. C. Installer: firm with minimum 5 years successful experience, regularly engaged in installation of specified materials, properly equipped and acceptable to manufacturer. D. National accounts 1. The Mapei or Laticrete products listed throughout this specification shall be purchased by the GC through the following national account, unless otherwise noted. a. Mapei: pro tile, 914.665.0654. Place order as a Victoria's secret or PINK store. Material will be provided from the nearest Mapei distribution center. b. Laticrete: Daltile, contact Dave Meyers, Laticrete national account representative 203.376.8113. Place order as a Victoria's Secret or PINK store. Material will be provided from the nearest Laticrete distribution center. 2. Which manufacturer is used depends on which one is being specified for the flooring material going over this floor prep. The same manufacturer must be used throughout any given finish floor material to maintain product warranties. 3. All other products listed which are the responsibility of the GC shall be purchased through local resources. E. Existing static substrate cracks: 1. Crack isolation membrane complying with ANSI 118.12 (for treatment along cracks only; must be installed over any required self -leveling underlayment). a. Mapei Mapelastic Aquadefence b. Laticrete International Hydroban F. Patching, ramping, and small fill areas: 1. Pre -blended polymer -modified cementitious fast setting high flow patching mortar, suitable from feather edge to 3 inch (76mm) application in confined areas and as a wear surf a. Mapei Mapecem Quickpatch b. Laticrete NXT patch G. Large fill areas and leveling: 1. Pourable cementitious, high -strength, fast - setting, non -shrink, self -leveling underlayment achieving a minimum of 4000 psi compressive strength at 28 days, complying with ASTM c349 and suitable from 1/8 inch to 1 inch (3mmto 25mm). a. Mapei Ultraplan 1 plus in conjunction with primer t (self -leveling primer) b. Laticrete NXT level plus in conjunction with Laticrete NXT primer 2. Substrate must be prepared by shot-blasting prior to installation of any self -leveling underlayment to achieve a surface profile between csp-3 and csp-6 as per ICRI standards. H. Installation: comply with all manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions. 1. Include accessories and equipment as required for complete installation. Concrete 02—DIVO3 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: 010500230 2. Do not install crack isolation membrane below any required self -leveling underlayment; cracks must be marked prior to installation of underlayment; otherwise, full coverage of crack isolation may be required. DIVISION 04 - MASONRY SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. Masonry construction shall conform to the requirements of ASCE 5-05 "building code requirements for masonry structures" and ASCE 6-05 "specifications for masonry structures". B. Hollow load bearing units shall be normal weight, type n1, conforming to ASTM c90, with a minimum net compressive strength of 2500 psi (fm = 1900 psi). C. Mortar shall be type M or S, conforming to ASTM c270. D. Course grout shall conform to ASTM c476 with a maximum aggregate size of 3/8" and a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi. E. Vertical reinforcement shall be as noted on the structural drawings with cells filled with coarse grout. F. Vertical reinforcement shall be held in position at the top and bottom and at a maximum spacing of 8'-0". Reinforcement shall be placed in the center of the masonry cell, typical unless otherwise noted. G. Reinforcing steel shall be lapped minimum 48 bar diameters where spliced unless noted otherwise on drawings. H. When a foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical core, it shall not be sloped more than one horizontal in six verticals. Dowels shall be grouted into a core in vertical alignment, even though it is in the cell adjacent to the vertical wall reinforcement. Horizontal wall reinforcement shall be standard truss type Dur-O-WaI at 16" c/c., unless shown otherwise on the drawings. I. Spliced wire reinforcement shall be lapped at least 6" and contain at least one cross wire of each piece of reinforcement within the 6 inches. Lap with standard '1" and "I" shaped pieces at intersections and comers. J. Provide a minimum of 3 courses high by 2 courses wide grouted solid masonry at beam bearing points. K. Provide precast concrete lintels over all openings unless noted otherwise on drawings. Lintels shall be of sufficient size and reinforcement for the given spans and loading conditions. Submit shop drawings with rated load capacities to the architect for review. L. Provide a knock -out block or u-block reinforced with (1)45 continuous at the sill of all window openings. Extend 16" beyond each side of the opening typically. END OF DIVISION 03 M. Bond pilasters to adjoining masonry walls with interlocking units. N. Provide 2 courses by 16" wide solid or grouted solid masonry at joist and lintel bearing points. SECTION 044000 - STONE ASSEMBLIES A. General: provide stone fabrications for cladding on curbs as indicated, including anchors, mortar, grout, and accessories as required for complete, finished installation. B. Design requirements: obtain each stone from single quarry source, with consistent color range and texture throughout work; do not change sources or kinds of materials during course of work. C. Quality control: observe stone during fabrication and ensure consistency of appearance; do not use pieces with defects and blemishes beyond normal characteristics anticipated for stone. 1. Defects and blemishes: contrasting spots, foreign elements, irregular color variations, and irregularities in typical characteristics shall be considered defects and blemishes. D. As indicated on drawings; each type of stone shall come from a single quarry to ensure consistent color. E. Mortar and grout materials: ASTM c150, type 1 Portland cement, ASTM c207, type S hydrated lime, and ASTM c144 sand, clean, free of harmful substances; use white cement at colored mortar and grout, color to match stone unless otherwise indicated. F. Accessories: provide accessories as required for complete installation. G. Fabrication: fabricate as shown and as detailed on final shop drawings with exposed surfaces smooth, true, and flat. 1. Cut accurately to shape and dimensions shown on final shop drawings; comply with fabrication tolerances of stone association for specified finishes. Zero tolerance where hairline joints are required. H. Installation: do not use material with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work. 1. Stone application: install curbs with soft stainless steel wire anchors, minimum 1/8" diameter set with Portland cement with shrinkage reducer (exterior); grout joints. 2. Execute work with skilled mechanics and employ skilled fitters at site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set. 3. Tool joints slightly concave. Concrete 03 — DIVO3 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Store #: 010500230 Version: 142Fa.01 END OF DIVISION 04 Masonry 01 — DIVO4 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store* 010500230 DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Provide miscellaneous metal shapes and fabrications as required and not included as part of other sections, with anchors and accessories as required for complete installation. B. Submittals: Furnish shop drawings for custom fabrications, product data for manufactured items; provide templates for anchor installation by others. C. Steel shapes: ASTM a36 steel. D. Provide non -shrink, non-metallic, pre -mixed, factory packaged, non -staining, non -corrosive, non-gaseous grout; type specifically recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated. E. Fasteners and rough hardware: Type required for specific usage; provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. F. Welding materials: AWS d1.1, type required for materials being welded. G. Provide primers as recommended by paint Manufacturers for substrates and paints specified in Section 099000 - Painting and Coating. 1. Galvanizing repair paint: high zinc -dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel. H. Fabrication: Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured; grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius. 1. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery. I. Finishes: Galvanize and prime paint exterior miscellaneous metal, prime paint interior miscellaneous metal; galvanize coating minimum g90 coating, galvanized after fabrication. 1. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to applying galvanized or painted finish. J. Installation: Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance; ensure alignment with adjacent construction; coordinate with related work to ensure no interruption in installation. 1. Supply items to be cast into or embedded in other materials to appropriate trades. 2. After installation, touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces; use primer consistent with shop coat or recommended for galvanized surfaces, as applicable. SECTION 057000 - DECORATIVE METAL A. General: Provide custom omamental metal items as indicated with accessories and attachment devices as required for complete, finished installation. 1. Omamental metal items: provide stainless steel base and break metal shapes as indicated on drawings. B. Submittals: Fumish product data, shop drawings, and samples of each exposed metal finish. C. Fabricator: Firm with minimum five years successful experience fabricating omamental metal items similar to those required for project. D. Stainless steel: ASTM a666, type 302/304 corrosion resistant stainless steel with no. 4 satin directional finish. E. Brackets and anchors: Unexposed plates, angles and supports may be steel; exposed items to match omamental metal type and finish. F. Fasteners: Type required for specific usage; provide concealed fasteners except where specifically approved; where exposed match type and finish of metal being fastened. 1. Concealed steel fasteners: hot -dipped galvanized minimum g90 where built into exterior walls or subject to high humidity. G. Fabrication: Fabricate component connections to support specified design loads. 1. Select materials for straightness, free of defects and irregularities 2. Exposed -to -view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, "oil canning", stains, discolorations, and imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. 3. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened; provide concealed connection devices with hidden fasteners. 4. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint where concealed, with preformed separators, or similar method to prevent corrosion. H. Installation: Install omamental metal items in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation instructions and approved shop drawings. 1. Install plumb, true and in correct relation to adjacent work, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance. 2. Prior to securing continuous items, adjust to ensure proper matching at butt joints and correct alignment throughout their length. 3. Repair or replace items damaged or marred during construction. END OF DIVISION 05 Metals 01 — DIVO5 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY A. General: Provide miscellaneous rough carpentry. B. Standards: Comply with requirements of American plywood association (APA) and applicable code requirements. C. Plywood: Provide minimum APA c-d plugged plywood; stress rated where spanning supporting members; fire retardant treated; minimum 3/4" thick unless otherwise indicated (at exterior locations provide minimum APA c-d exterior cdx plywood). 1. Plywood standard: comply with psi (ANSI a199.1). 2. Plywood panel boards: provide panel boards for electrical and communication panel boards; APA c-d plugged, interior type plywood with exterior glue, fire retardant treated; minimum 1/2" thick. D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners as required for complete, secure installation of miscellaneous rough carpentry; galvanized at exterior locations and pressure treated wood; size and type to suit application; provide washers for nuts and bolts. E. Installation: Comply with referenced standards and applicable code requirements. 1. Plywood: comply with recommendations of American plywood association (APA) for fabrication and installation of plywood work. 2. Place miscellaneous rough carpentry true to lines and levels. 3. Correlate location so attached work will comply with design requirements and be properly located. 4. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. 5. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate ft. 6. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as required by recognized standards. 7. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts in contact with wood. SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY A. B. General: Provide wood trim, wood shelving, and accessories as required for complete finished installation. Standards: Conform to architectural woodwork institute (AWI)/quality standards or woodwork institute (formerly woodwork institute of Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Califomia) "manual of millwork" standards; not less than custom grade where grade is not otherwise indicated. C. Submittals: Furnish product data for manufactured items, shop drawings for custom items, samples of each exposed finish. D. Certification: Certification will not be required. E. Delivery, storage and handling: Comply with referenced standards and manufacturer recommendations. F. Wood trim: Premium grade wood trim as indicated; refer to finish schedule. G. Wood shelving: Custom grade 3/4" wood board, particleboard, or hardwood -edged plywood. 1. Adjustable shelving brackets: provide heavy duty standards and brackets with slots 2" on center, supports maximum 24" apart, and minimum 12" shelf brackets unless otherwise indicated; color as selected by owner's project manager. H. Anchors, nails and screws: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws for drilled -in -place anchors. I. Wood filler. Color to match wood being filled. J. Fabrication: fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with specified quality standard. K. Installation: install work consistent with specified quality grade, plumb, and level. L. Preparation for field finishing: sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws; apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive site -applied finishes unless otherwise noted. 1. Seal concealed and semi -concealed surfaces; brush apply only, using primer consistent with finish coats specified under Section 099000 - painting and coating. SECTION 064000 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. General: Install owner furnished casework and countertops; provide accessories as required for complete finished installation. B. Standards: Conform to architectural woodwork institute (AWI)/quality standards or woodwork institute (formerly woodwork institute of Califomia) "manual of millwork" standards; not less than premium grade unless otherwise indicated. C. Submittals: Fumish product data for contractor fumished accessories including samples of exposed materials. D. Storage and handling: Comply with manufacturer recommendations. E. Architectural woodwork: Owner fumished casework and countertops. Wood, Plastics, & Composites 01 — DIVO6 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 F. Accessories: Provide as indicated and as required to install architectural woodwork as indicated; coordinate accessories required for installation of owner furnished architectural woodwork not furnished with architectural woodwork. G. Installation: Comply with manufacturer recommendations and referenced standards. Take special care coordinating installation of owner furnished architectural woodwork with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions. 1. Install work consistent with specified quality grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. 2. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work. 3. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting architectural woodwork are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by owner's project manager prior to commencement of installation. 4. Secure work to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. 5. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work. 6. Install architectural woodwork under supervision of factory -trained mechanics. 7. Attach architectural woodwork securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements. 8. Acceptable tolerances: a. Variation from true position: maximum 1/16" at any position and maximum 1/8" in any 10'-0" length b. Adjoining surfaces of same material: no variation permitted. SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Summaries A. Section includes wall sheathing and sheathing joint and penetration treatment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 Performance Requirements A. Fire -test -response characteristics: For assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM e 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire - resistance ratings are indicated by design designations from UL's "fire resistance directory." 2.02 Wood Panel Products Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the Califomia department of health services' "standard practice for the testing of volatile organic emissions from various sources using small-scale environmental chambers." 2.03 Fire -retardant -treated plywood A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with firetest - response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -retardant -treated plywood by pressure process: products with a flame -spread index of 25 or Tess when tested according to ASTM e 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the bumers at any time during the test. 1. Exterior type: treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire - retardant -treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM d 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Interior type a: treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM d 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 3. Design value adjustment factors: treated lumber plywood shall be tested according ASTM d 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM d 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. Where high -temperature fire -retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F (76 deg C) shall be not less than span ratings specified. C. Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire -retardant -treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 2.04 Wall Sheathing A. Exterior plywood wall sheathing: Exterior, Structural I, Exposure 1. Thickness as indicated on drawings. B. Interior plywood wall sheathing: Interior Grade Plywood. Thickness as indicated on drawings; %" minimum. C. Paper -surfaced gypsum wall sheathing: ASTM c 1396/c 1396m, gypsum sheathing; with water - Wood, Plastics, & Composites 02 — DIVO6 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 resistant -treated core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and long edges. Thickness as indicated on drawings. D. Glass -mat gypsum wall sheathing: ASTM c 1177/1177m. Thickness as indicated on drawings. E. Cellulose fiber -reinforced gypsum sheathing: ASTM c 1278/c 1278m, gypsum sheathing. Thickness as indicated on drawings. F. Cementitious backer units: ASTM c 1325, type a. thickness as indicated on drawings. 2.05 Cement Bonded Particle Board A. Materials: all cement board wall panels shall comply with en 634-2 for cement bonded particle boards; and shall be installed according to the manufacturer's most current published instructions. Wall panel thickness as indicated on drawings. B. Fire resistance properties: all cement board wall panels shall be rated for "0" flame spread and "0" smoke development per ASTM e84 and shall have passed a modified ASTM e136 test for a minimum duration of ten (10) minutes. C. Delivery and storage: 1. Deliver, store and handle materials to prevent breakage, warping or damage by water. 2. Acclimatize materials by storing on site not less than three (3) days before installation. 3. Materials to be stored indoors on leveled dunnage not exceeding 32" on centers. If temporarily stored outdoors, boards must be elevated above ground, and protected from the weather with waterproof covering. 4. Panels to be stored flat and not on edges. D. Surface treatments: Verify cement board will accept paint as indicated on drawings - refer to the paint manufacturer in all instances. for surface treatments that are not vapor or moisture permeable, the reverse and all edges of the panel should also be treated in the same way to avoid the panel being unbalanced and exhibiting warping under extreme conditions of humidity variance 2.06 Fasteners A. General: provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacturer. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners as indicated on drawings. 2.07 Sheathing Joint -And -Penetration Treatment Materials A. Sealant for paper -surfaced gypsum sheathing: elastomeric, medium -modulus, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 sealants specified in Division 07 Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." B. Sealant for glass -mat gypsum sheathing: silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM c 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass -fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Sheathing tape: self -adhering glass -fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass -mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in- service use. C. Sealant for cement bonded particle board: 1. Exterior applications: use premixed elastomeric joint caulking or sealant as approved by the synthetic coatings manufacturer's finish system. Use only fully elastomeric synthetic coatings. 2. Interior applications: design for visible panel joints or use metal or plastic batten cover strips at panel joints. 2.08 Miscellaneous Materials A. Adhesives for field gluing panels to framing: formulation complying with ASTM d 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation, General A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "fastening schedule," in ICC's "intemational building code." D. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. 3.02 Wood Structural Panel Installation A. General: comply with applicable recommendations in APA form no. e30, Wood, Plastics, & Composites 03 — DIVO6 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 "engineered wood construction guide," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated. B. Fasten panels as indicated below for wall sheathing: 1. Nail or staple to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. a. Exterior Grade plywood uses waterproof glue; Interior Grade plywood uses glue that is not waterproof. 2. Screw to cold -formed metal framing. 3. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends 3.03 Gypsum Sheathing Installation A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with nails or screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold -formed metal framing with screws. B. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 Cement Bonded Particle Board Installation A. A support framing member must always occur behind fastener location. B. Do not nail or screw any collateral building materials to panels without a secure backing surface behind the panel to receive the fastener. Toggle bolting is required where no secure backing surface is provided. C. Deflection of panels shall be limited to V240. D. In exterior applications, control joints (where applicable) shall be designed to prevent transfer Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 of any movement or stress to exterior finish systems. Through -wall control joints shall be designed to isolate a maximum of 250 sq. ft. of wall area. Provide separate framing member at each side of control joint. E. Comply with applicable building codes for wind, seismic and other load requirements. F. Install panels with long dimensions vertical. All panel joints must occur over a framing member. All panel edges are to be supported by a framing member. G. Provide 1/8" vertical and horizontal joints between panels. H. Use panel thickness as indicated on drawings. I. Use 2" minimum flange width stud framing for single stud back-up at panel joints. If stud framing at panel joints uses Tess than 2" flange width, use double studs at panel joint locations. Opposite side of stud wall to be restrained against stud rotation. J. Never install panels while wet or damp. K. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non - load -bearing construction abuts structural elements. L. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. 3.05 Cementitious Backer Unit Installation A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI a108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. END OF DIVISION 06 Wood, Plastics, & Composites 04 — DIVO6 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 071416 - WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Integral waterproofing: liquid rubber integral tile setting waterproofing system with no bituminous extenders, designed for application under tile; extend 6" up wall. B. Submittals: 1. No submittals shall be required. 2. No substitutions will be allowed. C. Installer: Firm with minimum 5 years successful experience, regularly engaged in installation of specified materials, properly equipped and acceptable to manufacturer. D. Provide a waterproof membrane when required by the following: 1. The building owner (landlord) or local building official 2. Above grade toilet room installations E. Allowable products 1. Mapei Corp: Mapelastic Aquadefense 2. Laticrete International: Hydroban F. Installation: 1. Follow all manufacturer instructions for installation. 2. Provide all accessories and equipment necessary for a complete installation. 3. When using fiber mesh lap at least 2 inches at joints. 4. Carefully place tile and setting materials over waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured or otherwise damaged. Replace protection materials that become displaced and arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with tile. 5. Provide cork joint filler, where indicated, at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces or, if not indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until tile installation is complete. SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION A. General: provide thermal insulation with accessories as required for complete installation. 1. Insulation integral with roofing repairs is provided with roofing, and acoustical insulation is provided with gypsum board assemblies. B. Thermal batt insulation: Owens coming/FS-25 (1.800.438.7465); thermafiber FS25 (1.888.834.2371), or Johns Manville/FSK-25 (1.800.654.3103); foil faced vapor retarder faced, vapor retarder toward inside. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 1. Thickness/R-value: R-13 (walls), others, as indicated on drawings. C. Accessories: Provide tape or penetration anchors where required to ensure permanent installation. D. Installation: Comply with manufacturer recommendations. SECTION 072400 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Materials and installation of EIFS 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 061600: Sheathing B. Section 072100: Thermal Insulation C. Section 075900: Roof Repairs D. Section 076000: Flashing and Sheet Metal E. Section 079200: Joint Sealants F. Section 084113: Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts G. Section 088100: Glazing 1.03 Design Requirements A. Substrate systems should be designed to withstand applicable loads, including live, dead, positive and negative wind, seismic, etc. bond strength, fastener strength and connection strength shall be analyzed and engineered, and appropriate factors of safety shall be used. Maximum deflection of substrate systems shall not exceed I/240th of the span. Dimensional tolerances: 1. Structural steel framing used to support the EIFS system shall meet the requirements of the American institute of steel construction. 2. Brick, masonry and concrete substrates and exterior grade sheathing shall be flat within 1/4" depth within any 4' radius. Light gauge steel framing: 1. Thickness shall be determined by loads using accepted engineering practices with minimum thickness being 20 gage at maximum 16" stud spacing. 2. Section properties of members shall meet the latest arise standards. 3. All stud, track, bridging and bracing connections shall be electric fusion welded. Field erected framing shall be screw fastened. 4. Framing will include stud, track, bridging and bracing and be galvanized or painted with rust -resistant primer. 5. When light gauge steel framing is continued past the floorline, the stud cavity flue shall be continuously firestopped at the floorline. The space between the edge of the floor and the slab shall be sealed with safing material as per building code requirements. Acceptable substrates: 1. As detailed and indicated on drawings. B. C. D. Thermal & Moisture Protection 01 — DIVO7 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store* 010500230 2. Sheathing shall be protected at all times prior to installation of the EIFS system to ensure that damage to the sheathing does not occur and that the bond between the gypsum and its facing has not been compromised. E. Min. slope of inclined surfaces shall be not less than 6" of rise in 12" of horizontal projection. Inclined areas defined as roof shall not use the precor system. F. Wind load: Design for maximum allowable system deflection, normal to the plane of the wall, of V240. Design for wind load in conformance with code requirements. G. Moisture control: Prevent the accumulation of water behind the EIFS system, either by condensation or leakage through the wall construction, in the design and detailing of the wall assembly. 1. Provide flashing to direct water to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly, including, above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills, at roof/wall intersections, decks, abutments of lower walls with higher walls, above projecting features, and at the base of the wall. 2. Vapor diffusion and condensation: perform a dew point analysis of the wall assembly to determine the potential for accumulation of moisture in the wall assembly as a result of water vapor diffusion and condensation. Adjust insulation thickness and/or other wall assembly components accordingly to minimize the risk of condensation. Avoid the use of vapor retarders on the interior side of the wall in warm, humid climates. H. Impact resistance per 2.06 reinforcing meshes, provide ultra -high impact resistance to a min. height of 6'-0" (1.8 m) above finished grade at all areas accessible to pedestrian traffic and other areas exposed to abnormal stress or impact. I. Joints: 1. Design minimum 3/4" wide expansion joints in the EIFS where they exist in the substrate or supporting construction, where the EIFS adjoins dissimilar construction or materials, at changes in building height, and at floor lines in multi -level wood frame construction. 2. Minimum 1/2" wide sealant joints at all penetrations through the EIFS (windows, doors, etc.) 3. Install backer rod and sealant that has been evaluated in accordance with ASTM c 1382, "test method for determining tensile adhesion properties of sealants when used in exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) joints", and that meets minimum 50% elongation after conditioning. 4. Design joints with secondary moisture protection and drain joints to the exterior. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Refer to storefront details for locations if required. J. Trim, projecting architectural features and reveals: all trim and projecting architectural features must have a minimum 1:2 [27°] slope along their top surface. All horizontal reveals must have a minimum 1:2 [27°] slope along their bottom surface. K. Terminations 1. Where window and door heads and jambs and other elements penetrate the substrate, a minimum 1/2" will be left between the EIFS and that element, in order to accommodate the installation of backer rod and sealant. The single exception is in a sill condition, where sill flashing is installed and tums down onto the vertical face of the Precor-SB system. Other exceptions shall be only as approved by Corev America. 2. Windows must be designed with the proper sill pan, end dams, or other design elements to ensure that any water penetrating the window assembly is diverted to the exterior of the building. 3. The EIFS shall terminate at least 8" above grade. 4. At rooflines, balconies and other terminations, adequate flashing, including diverter flashing, shall be designed and installed to prevent water infiltration into the wall assembly. L. Sealants: sealant shall be installed per the sealant manufacturer's specifications, using accessories and components approved by that manufacturer. Backer rods shall be closed cell. M. Details: follow Corev America's latest published information for standard detail treatments, utilizing Precor-SB system. 1.04 Performance Requirements A. Shall comply with requirements as specified by manufacturer's published instructions 1.05 Submittals A. Samples: 1. G.C. shall provide one 12" x 12" sample of the Precor-SB system, representative of the proper finish coating, texture and color, shall be prepared using the same tool and technique as required by the job. 2. One sample shall remain at the jobsite for comparison of texture and color. 1.06 Quality Assurance A. Installation Company: 1. Shall be a company specializing in the work of this section and approved by Corev America. 2. Shall have a minimum five years experience in the installation of EIFS, with experience with projects of the scope and complexity of the specified project. Thermal & Moisture Protection 02 — DIV07 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 3. Shall employ installation personnel qualified in the trowel trades and experienced in EIFS installation. B. Insulation board manufacturer: 1. Shall be approved in writing by Corey America and be competent in the manufacture of expanded polystyrene insulation board. 2. Shall manufacture the insulation board according to Corey America's specs. C. Sealant contractor: 1. The general contractor or owner shall ensure that the sealant contractor is qualified to perform the sealant work in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's specifications. 2. The applicator shall be properly trained so that a competent installation of the specified sealant system is achieved. 1.07 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in Corey America's original unopened packaging with labels intact. B. Protect materials from damage by storing in a cool, dry space, protected from direct sun and freezing temps. Buckets shall not be stacked more than three high. 1.08 Job conditions / environmental requirements A. Materials shall not be applied to a substrate with a temperature lower than 40° f or higher than 100° f. B. The ambient air temperature will be a minimum of 40° f and rising at the time of installation and remain so for twenty-four (24) hours thereafter. C. For EIFS installation in ambient temperatures lower than 40° f, enclose the area and apply supplementary heat during installation and for a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours after the installation of materials is complete. D. Do not install EIFS materials during rain or other inclement weather, and after such weather, wait until surfaces are completely dry before resuming work. E. Adjacent areas and materials shall be protected to preclude damage during materials installation. F. The EIFS assembly shall be protected from weather immediately after installation through use of flashing. Plastic should be used to cover areas that may be exposed to moisture prior to drying. G. Proper scheduling of the installation will be coordinated with the general contractor and the job will be staffed to maintain the schedule established. H. The general contractor shall provide access to electric power and clean water where the EIFS system is to be installed. 1.09 Warranty A. Corey America will provide a written 10-year limited warranty against defective materials. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Corey America shall make no other warranties, expressed or implied. Corey America does not warrant workmanship associated with installation of EIFS system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers A. Provide EIFS system and accessories from single source manufacturer or approved supplier. The following are acceptable manufacturers: 1. Corey America - Precor-SB EIFS system (1.713.937.3437) 2. Plastic Components, Inc. -accessories (1.800.327.7077) 2.02 Surface Preparation A. Corey America approved product for surface preparation, compatible with Precor-SB system components. 2.03 Waterproofing Membrane: A. Impercorev acrylic polymer elastomeric waterproofing membrane 2.04 Adhesive A. Unibase adhesive: acrylic polymer cement modifier mixed at jobsite with Portland cement, used to adhere the EPS to approved substrate. 2.05 Insulation Board A. Nominal 1.0Ib./cubic foot expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation board complying with ASTM c 578 type 1 requirements and EIMA guideline specification for expanded polystyrene insulation board. Such insulation board shall be produced for Corey America by manufacturers approved by Corey America. Minimum thickness of EPS for the precor system shall be 3/4" after all rasping is complete, including any point here it has been routered or grooved. Maximum thickness of EPS shall be 1" U.O.N. 2.06 Base Coat A. Unibase-WP: An acrylic polymer cement modifier with a high resistance to moisture. An element of the base coat mixture. 1. Unibase-WP basecoat: a combination of unibase-wp acrylic polymer cement modifier and Portland cement. Mixed at the jobsite. 2.07 Reinforcing Meshes A. Corevnet-DTA reinforcing mesh (adhesive - backed detail): used with precor-sb system to tape sheathing joints, as an element of the secondary water -resistive barrier. B. Corevnet-DT reinforcing mesh (detail): a corev- supplied treated glass -fiber reinforcing mesh in the unibase lamina used in detailed work and for backwrap at all system terminations to strengthen the surface of the eps insulation board. 2.0 oz./sy C. Corevnet-ST reinforcing mesh (standard): a corev-supplied treated glass -fiber reinforcing Thermal & Moisture Protection 03 — DIVO7 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 mesh in the unibase lamina used to strengthen the surface of the eps insulation board. 4.4 oz./sy D. Corevnet-rf reinforcing mesh (reinforced): a corev-supplied treated glass -fiber reinforcing mesh in the unibase lamina used in high -traffic areas to strengthen the surface of the eps insulation board. 10.6 oz./sy E. Corevnet-hd reinforcing mesh (heavy duty): a corev-supplied treated glass -fiber reinforcing mesh in the unibase lamina used in high -traffic areas to strengthen the surface of the eps insulation board. 14.0 oz./sy F. Corevnet-shd reinforcing mesh (super heavy duty): a corev-supplied treated glass -fiber reinforcing mesh in the unibase lamina used in high -traffic areas to strengthen the surface of the eps insulation board. 20.0 oz./sy G. Corev-corner: a corev-supplied treated glass - fiber reinforcing mesh to add increased impact resistance to corners. 7.0 oz./sy 2.08 Primer A. Pintuprime (vapor permeable, acrylic primer) 2.09 Finish Coat A. Quarry: factory -mixed, acrylic polymer based finish coating containing integral color. Color: qr7070f, texture: smooth. 2.10 Penetrating Sealer A. Vitrocorev (clear, acrylic sealer) 2.11 Job Mixed Ingredients A. Water: clean and clear, free of foreign matter, and potable. B. Portland cement: ASTM c 150 type for ii Portland cement, gray color, with fine powder consistency and free of lumps. 2.12 Mixing A. Mix in compliance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Mix only as much material as can readily be used. C. Do not use anti -freeze compounds or other additives. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Acceptable Installers A. Prequalify under quality assurance requirements of this specification (section 1.05.b). 3.02 Examination A. Verify the substrate is appropriate for use with the Corev Precor system. B. Inspect substrate surfaces for: 1. Contamination: algae, chalkiness, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form oil, fungus, grease, laitance, mildew or other foreign substances. 2. Surface absorption and chalkiness. 3. Cracks: measure crack width and record location of cracks. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 4. Damage and deterioration. 5. Moisture content and moisture damage: use a moisture meter to determine if the surface is dry enough to receive the EIFS and record any areas of moisture damage. 6. Compliance with specification tolerances: record areas that are out of tolerance (greater than 1/4 inch in 8-0 feet deviation in plane). C. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that might adversely affect the EIFS installation to the general contractor. Do not start work until deviations are corrected. 3.03 Surface Preparation A. Remove surface contaminants on concrete and concrete masonry surfaces (Refer to ASTM d 4258 and d 4261). B. Apply conditioner by to chalking or excessively absorptive surfaces. C. Replace weather -damaged sheathing and repair damaged or cracked surfaces. D. level surfaces to comply with required tolerances. 3.04 Installation A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.05 Protection A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. Provide protection of installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high humidity until they are fully dry. SECTION 072400 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) - STO THERM HURRICANE IMPACT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Materials and installation of hurricane impact resistant EIF system with secondary moisture barrier and provisions for drainage. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 072100: Thermal Insulation B. Section 075900: Roof Repairs C. Section 076000: Flashing and Sheet Metal D. Section 079200: Joint Sealants E. Section 084113: Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts F. Section 088100: Glazing G. Section 092900: Gypsum Board 1.03 Design Requirements A. Wind load: Design for maximum allowable system deflection, normal to the plane of the wall, of 1/240. Design for wind load in conformance with code requirements. Thermal & Moisture Protection 04 — DIV07 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 B. Moisture control: Prevent the accumulation of water behind the EIFS system, either by condensation or leakage through the wall construction, in the design and detailing of the wall assembly. 1. Provide flashing to direct water to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly, including, above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills, at roof/wall intersections, decks, abutments of lower walls with higher walls, above projecting features, and at the base of the wall. 2. Vapor diffusion and condensation— perform a dew point analysis of the wall assembly to determine the potential for accumulation of moisture in the wall assembly as a result of water vapor diffusion and condensation. Adjust insulation thickness and/or other wall assembly components accordingly to minimize the risk of condensation. Avoid the use of vapor retarders on the interior side of the wall in warm, humid climates. C. Impact resistance per 2.06 reinforcing meshes, provide ultra -high impact resistance to a min. height of 6'-0" (1.8 m) above finished grade at all areas accessible to pedestrian traffic and other areas exposed to abnormal stress or impact. D. Joints 1. Design minimum 3/4 inch wide expansion joints in the EIFS where they exist in the substrate or supporting construction, where the EIFS adjoins dissimilar construction or materials, at changes in building height, and at floor lines in multi -level wood frame construction. 2. Minimum 1/2 inch wide sealant joints at all penetrations through the EIFS (windows, doors, etc.). 3. install backer rod and sealant that has been evaluated in accordance with ASTM c 1382, "test method for determining tensile adhesion properties of sealants when used in exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) joints," and that meets minimum 50% elongation after conditioning. 4. Design joints with secondary moisture protection and drain joints to the exterior. Refer to storefront details for locations if required. E. Trim, projecting architectural features and reveals 1. All trim and projecting architectural features must have a minimum 1:2 [27°] slope along their top surface. All horizontal reveals must have a minimum 1:2 [27°] slope along their bottom surface. F. Fire protection do not use foam plastic in excess of 4 inches thick. Where a fire -resistance rating is required by code use EIFS over rated assembly. 1.04 Submittals Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 A. Samples for approval as directed by LSD&C project manager. B. Prepare and submit project -specific details (when required by contract documents). C. Insulation board manufacturer requirements 1. Recognized by STO as capable of producing insulation board to meet system requirements, and hold a valid licensing agreement with STO. 2. Listed by an approved agency. 3. Label insulation board with information required by STO, the approved listing agency and the applicable building code. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer requirements 1. Member in good standing of the EIFS industry members association (EIMA). 2. System manufacturer for a minimum of twenty (20) years. Manufacturing facilities 150 9002 certified. 3. Manufacturer's wall assembly listed in gypsum association fire resistance design manual. B. Contractor requirements 1. Engaged in application of EIFS for a minimum of three (3) years. 2. knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of STO materials and listed by STO as having attended STO EIFS continuing education. 3. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in EIFS application, and familiar with the requirements of the specified work. 4. Successful completion of minimum of three (3) projects of similar size and complexity of the specified project. 5. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install the system in compliance with STO's published specifications and details and the project plans and specifications. C. Insulation board manufacturer requirements 1. Recognized by STO as capable of producing insulation board to meet system requirements, and hold a valid licensing agreement with STO. 2. Listed by an approved agency 3. Label insulation board with information required by STO, the approved listed agency and the applicable building code. 1.06 Delivery, Storage And Handling A. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name and identification of product. B. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90°f store away from direct sunlight. Thermal & Moisture Protection 05 — DIVO7 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: 010500230 C. Protect Portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and humidity. Store under cover off the ground in a dry location. 1.07 Project/Site Conditions A. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40°f during application and drying period, minimum 24 hours after application of EIFS. B. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40°f (4°c). C. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of materials. 1.08 Coordination/Scheduling A. Provide site grading such that EIFS terminates above finished grade a minimum of 8 inches (203 mm) or as required by code. B. Coordinate installation of foundation waterproofing, roofing membrane, windows, doors and other wall penetrations to provide a leakproof building envelope. C. Provide protection of rough openings before installing windows, doors, and other penetrations through the wall and provide sill flashing. D. Install window and door head flashing immediately after windows and doors are installed. E. Install diverter fleshings wherever water can enter the wall assembly to direct water to the exterior. F. Install copings and sealant immediately after installation of the EIFS system and when EIFS coatings are dry. G. Attach penetrations through EIFS to structural support and provide water tight seal at penetrations. 1.09 Warranty A. Provide manufacturer's 7 year standard labor and material warranty PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers A. Provide moisture barrier, EIF system and accessories from single source manufacturer or approved supplier. B. The following are acceptable manufacturers: 1. STO Corp. —moisture barrier, EIF system (1.888.786.3437) a. STO HI- at system- small missile: Miami- Dade county product approval: noa#03-0527.12 b. STO H- at system- large missile, Miami - Dade county product approval: noa#03- 0422.01 2. Plastic Components, Inc. —accessories (1.800.327.7077) C. Accessories 1. Starter track rigid PVC (polyvinyl chloride) plastic track part no. stde as fumished by plastic components, Inc., 9051 NW 97th terrace, Miami, Florida 33178 (1.800.327.7077). 2.02 Moisture Barrier A. STO guard air and moisture barrier system. 1. STO gold fill and STO guard mesh joint treatment system for rough opening protection and joint treatment of wall sheathing. 2. STO gold coat ready mixed acrylic based water proofing coating. 2.03 Adhesive A. Cementitious adhesive 1. STO primer/adhesive-b—one component polymer modified cement based, factory blend, adhesive with Tess than 33 percent Portland cement content by weight (for use over exterior gypsum sheathing, dens -glass gold sheathing, exterior cementitious sheathing , concrete, masonry or plaster surfaces). 2.04 Insulation Board A. STO EPS insulation board 1. Nominal 1.0 Ib/ft3 (16 kg/m3) expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation board in compliance with ASTM c 578 type I requirements, and EIMA guideline specification for expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation board. (Note: minimum required thickness is 2 inches [25 mm] and maximum allowable thickness is typically 4 inches [100 mm] unless thicker dimensions are approved by the code official). 2.05 Base Coat A. Cementitious base coat 1. STO primer/adhesive-b—one component polymer modified cement based factory blend, base coat with less than 33 percent Portland cement content by weight. B. Waterproof base coat 1. STO flexyl—two component fiber reinforced acrylic based waterproof base coat mixed with Portland cement (for use as a waterproof base coat to waterproof foundations, parapets, splash areas, trim and other projecting architectural features). 2.06 Reinforcing Meshes A. high impact mesh 1. STO intermediate mesh —nominal 11.2 oz./yd2 (380 g/m2), high impact, interwoven, open weave glass fiber fabric with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with STO materials (achieves high impact classification). B. Ultra -high impact mesh 1. STO armor mat —nominal 15 oz./yd2 (509 g/m2), ultra -high impact, double strand, interwoven, open -weave glass fiber fabric Thermal & Moisture Protection 06 — DIVO7 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with STO materials (recommended to a minimum height of 6'-0" [1.8m] above finished grade at all areas accessible to pedestrian traffic and other areas exposed to abnormal stress or impact. Achieves ultrahigh impact classification when applied beneath STO mesh or STO intermediate mesh). C. Specialty meshes 1. STO detail mesh —nominal 4.5 oz/yd2 (153 g/m2), flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric, with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with STO materials (used for standard EIFS backwrapping, aesthetic detailing, splice joints in intermediate mesh, and protection of rough openings with moisture barrier). 2. STO comer mat —nominal 7.8 oz./yd2 (265 g/m2), pre -creased, heavy-duty, open -weave woven glass fiber fabric with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with STO materials (used for maximum impact protection at inside and outside comers). 2.07 Primer A. STO primer acrylic based tinted primer. 2.08 Finish coat A. STO limestone finish (2-step process, using STO): 1.0 mm aggregate as 1st coat and STOLIT freeform as 2nd coat), custom finish as indicated on storefront drawings. 2.09 Penetrating Sealer A. STO penetrating sealer (clear, siloxane-based) 2.10 Job Mixed Ingredients A. Water —clean and potable. B. Portland cement —type I in conformance with ASTM c 150. 2.11 Mixing A. STO Plex W: add water as directed on labeling. B. STO leveler: mix ratio with water: 6-7 quarts (5.7- 6.6 I) of clean water per 60 pound (27.3 kg) bag of STO leveler. Pour water into a clean mixing pail add STO leveler, mix to a uniform consistency and allow to set for approximately 5 minutes. Adjust mix if necessary with additional STO leveler or water and remix to a uniform trowel consistency. Avoid retempering. Keep mix ratio consistent. Do not exceed maximum water amount in mix ratio. C. STO RFP—mix with a clean, rust -free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency. D. STO flexyl—mix ratio with Portland cement: 1:1 ratio by weight. Pour STO flexyl into a clean mixing pail. Add Portland cement, mix to a uniform consistency and allow to set for approximately five minutes. Adjust mix if necessary with additional STO flexyl and remix to Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 a uniform trowel consistency. Avoid retempering. Keep mix ratio consistent. E. STO primer —mix with a clean, rust -free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency. F. STOLIT—mix with a clean, rust -free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency. A small amount of water may be added to adjust workability. Limit addition of water to amount needed to achieve the finish texture. G. Mix only as much material as can readily be used. H. Do not use anti -freeze compounds or other additives. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Acceptable Installers A. Prequalify under quality assurance requirements of this specification (Section 1.07.b). 3.02 Examination A. Inspect surfaces for: 1. Contamination — algae, chalkiness, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form, Oil, fungus, grease, laitance, mildew or other foreign substances. 2. Surface absorption and chalkiness. 3. Cracks — measure crack width and record location of cracks. 4. Damage and deterioration. 5. Moisture content and moisture damage — use a moisture meter to determine if the surface is dry enough to receive the EIFS and record any areas of moisture damage. 6. Compliance with specification tolerances — record areas that are out of tolerance (greater than 1/4 inch in 8-0 feet deviation in plane). B. Inspect sheathing application for compliance with applicable requirement: 1. Exterior gypsum sheathing—ga-253 2. Exterior grade and exposure I wood based sheathing—APA engineered wood association e 30 3. Glass mat faced gypsum sheathing —Georgia pacific publication 101514 4. Cementitious sheathing —consult manufacturer's published recommendations C. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that might adversely affect the EIFS installation to the general contractor. Do not start work until deviations are corrected. 3.03 Surface Preparation A. Remove surface contaminants on concrete and concrete masonry surfaces (Refer to ASTM d 4258 and d 4261). B. Apply conditioner by sprayer or roller to chalking or excessively absorptive surfaces. C. Replace weather -damaged sheathing and repair damaged or cracked surfaces. Thermal & Moisture Protection 07 — DIVO7 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 D. Level surfaces to comply with required tolerances. 3.04 Installation A. Install EIFS in compliance with manufacturer's published instructions (see addendum). 3.05 Protection A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. B. Provide protection of installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high humidity until they are fully dry. SECTION 075900 - ROOF REPAIRS A. General: Repair existing roofing system as required for new construction, with components and accessories as required for complete weathertight installation. B. Standards: Conform to National Roofing Contractors Association roofing and waterproofing manual, 4th or 5th edition. C. Warranty: Provide for correcting failure of roof repairs to resist penetration of water and damage from wind; warranty period of two years. D. Roofing system: Match existing roofing, no substitutions permitted; provide materials capable of maintaining existing warranties; conform to requirements of NRCA roofing manual. Provide complete system with accessories as required for repairs, including insulation where existing roofing is insulated. E. Roof system repairs: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions and NRCA recommendations for roof type specified. 1. Remove existing roofing as required for project; remove only as much roofing as can be replaced in same day unless otherwise approved in advance by owner's project manager. 2. Inspect substrates and roof deck to ensure substrates and deck are clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves or projections, and are properly sloped to drains, valley, or eaves. 3. Insulation application: attach insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions and NRCA recommendations for installation of insulation on deck involved. 4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of composition type base, wall and field flashings. 5. Coordinate metal flashings and counterflashing. 6. Coordinate installation of roof drains and counterflashing 7. Mop in and seal fleshings and flanges of items projecting through membrane. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 SECTION 076000 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL A. General: Provide flashing and sheet metal, reglets, and accessories as required for roof repairs as required for complete, weathertight installation. B. Flashing/sheet metal at storefront is prefinished. C. Standards: conform to SMACNA "architectural sheet metal manual" requirements for flashing and sheet metal. D. Design requirements: Allow for movement of components without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100 year seasonal temperature ranges. E. Submittals: Furnish product data for manufactured products. F. Warranty: Correct failure of metal flashing system to resist penetration of water and damage from wind; warranty period two years. 1. Flashing and sheet metal: match existing, but not Tess than following. Galvanized metal flashing: ASTM a924 and a653 g90 galvanized steel; minimum 24 gage. 2. Prefinished metal flashing: 24 gage galvanized steel with factory finished kynar 500 type fluoropolymer coating and strippable protective film; color as selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 3. Aluminum flashing: ASTM b209, alloy as required to match finish specified for other aluminum components; thickness minimum 0.050" at flashings. 4. Stainless steel sheet metal: ASTM a666, 2d annealed finish, soft temper except where harder temper is required for forming or performance; 0.015" (28 gage) typical. 5. Copper sheet metal: ASTM b370, cold rolled 16 oz. (0.0216") thick; soft temper where required for forming. G. Reglets: Fry/Springlok or MM systems/snap-tite reglets; fabricate of same metal as adjacent flashing and sheet metal. H. Metal to metal sealant: Butyl type; non -staining, non -corrosive, non -shrinking, non -sagging, ultra- violet and ozone resistant. SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING A. General: Patch existing fireproofing as required by applicable codes for construction type; no asbestos permitted. B. Conform to applicable code requirements for both f and t ratings. C. Standards: Pass ASTM e814 through penetration fire stops, ASTM el 19 fire tests and ASTM e84 flame spread/smoke contribution maximum 25/25. Thermal & Moisture Protection 08 — DIVO7 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 1. Fire resistance ratings: comply with required ratings based on tests in accordance with ASTM e119. 2. Surface buming characteristics: maximum 25 flame spread and 25 smoke density when tested in accordance with ASTM e84. D. Certificate: Submit manufacturer certification indicating applicator acceptability and material compliance with applicable codes and contract documents. 1. Certification shall indicate new materials used to patch existing fireproofed members at new and existing work are compatible with existing fireproofing materials and meet all performance requirements. E. Qualification of applicator: firm acceptable to manufacturer of fireproofing materials, with minimum five years successful experience on projects of similar scope. F. Manufacturers/products: Match existing but not Tess than w.r. grace/monokote or albi manufacturing division stanchem/duraspray. G. Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and fire test results as required to provide required fire ratings. 1. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fallout, and dusting; mask adjacent work as required. Close off and seal duct work in areas where fireproofing is being applied. 2. Clean substrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, paints, primers, and other matter which affects bond of sprayed fireproofing. 3. Apply fireproofing in sufficient thickness and density to achieve required fire ratings. 4. Apply fireproofing over substrate, building to required thickness with as many passes or stages necessary to cover with monolithic blanket of uniform density and texture. SECTION 078400 - FIRESTOPPING A. General: Provide exterior and interior firestopping not provided elsewhere; type suitable for application indicated with accessories as required for complete installation. B. Codes: Conform to applicable code requirements for both f and t ratings. C. Standards: Pass ASTM e814 through -penetration fire stops, ASTM e119 fire tests and ASTM e84 flame spread/smoke contribution maximum 25/25. D. Submittals: Furnish shop drawings, product data, and certificates of compliance with contract documents and applicable codes. E. Manufacturers: 3m/Fire Barrier, STI/Specseal or Pensil, or Hilti/Firestop systems. F. General: Choose products and methods meeting applicable codes and specification requirements Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 for each firestopping application, subject to architect's acceptance. G. Firestopping materials: Fumish materials for penetrations in time -rated floor, wall, and partition assemblies capable of preventing passage of flame, smoke, and hot gases. 1. Penetration test: fumish materials passing ASTM e814 for penetration fire stopping indicating maintenance of time -rated adjacent assemblies. 2. Firestopping: maintain fire rating of assembly in which firestopping is installed, such as floor, partition, or wall, in accordance with ASTM e119 tests. H. Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and fire test results as required to provide required fire ratings. 1. Field inspections: maintain copy of manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations at each work area. SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANT A. General: Provide exterior and interior joint sealers not provided elsewhere; type suitable for application indicated with accessories as required for complete installation. B. Installer qualifications: Firm with minimum five year's successful experience on projects of similar type and size, using specified products C. Submittals: Fumish product data and samples of exposed joint sealers in required colors. D. Warranty: Repair or replace joint sealers which fail to perform as intended, because of leaking, crumbling, hardening, shrinkage, bleeding, sagging, staining and loss of adhesion; warranty period two years. E. Exterior non -traffic joints: GE/Silpruf, Dow/790- 795, Pecora/854, or Tremco/spectrum 3 low modulus silicone sealant. F. Traffic bearing joints: TremcoNulkem 245, Pecora/nr-200 Urexpan, or Sonnebom division Chemrex/sl 2 multi -component polyurethane, self -leveling joint sealer. G. Mildew -resistant sanitary sealants: GE/SCS 1702 sanitary sealant, Dow/786 bathtub caulk, Pecora/863 #345 white, or Tremco/Tremsil 200; provide at interior areas where sealant will be exposed to water. H. General interior joint sealer: Pecora/ac-20, Sonnebom/Sonolac, or Tremco/Ultrem 1500 acrylic or latex emulsion. I. Miscellaneous materials: Primers, sealers, joint cleaners, bond breaker tape, and sealant backer rods as recommended by sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 1. Oversize backer rod minimum 30% to 50% of joint opening. As indicated in the drawings herein. J. Preparation: Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of joint sealer, and prime or Thermal & Moisture Protection 09 — DIVO7 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 seal joint surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. K. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM c1193. 1. Employ installation techniques which will ensure joint sealers are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of bond surfaces. SECTION 079513 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES A. General: 1. Joint cover systems shall allow unrestrained movement of joint without disengagement of cover. 2. Joint sizes shall be as indicated on drawings. 3. Fire rating characteristics: a. Prefabricated fire barrier assemblies shall have ratings not less than the rating of adjacent construction when tested in accordance with, UL 263, ANSI a2.1, NFPA 251, ASTM e119-95a and ASTM e1399-91 b. System shall be capable of anticipated movement while maintaining fire rating. 4. Provide manufacturers standard one year material and workmanship warranty. B. Products: 1. MM Systems Corporation (50 MM way, P.O. Box 98, Pandergrass, Georgia 30567; 1.800.241.3460 or 1.706.824.7500). Or equal as approved by LSD&C project Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 manager and architect; submit for review of equal product. 2. Products joint sizes as indicated in drawings. Refer to manufacturer for corresponding model number: a. Gypsum board ceiling condition = flexible wall & ceiling VSW series b. ACT ceiling condition = flexible wall & ceiling VSG series c. Floor to wall condition = Flushline FSE series d. Floor to floor condition = Flushline FS series e. Wall to wall condition = Flushline FSWP series f. Corner wall condition = Flushline FSWPL series Carpet to wall condition = Flushline FSSTE series h. Carpet to carpet condition = Flushline FSST series 3. Finish: mill finish aluminum frames with colors as indicated on drawings. Aluminum wall covers to be clear anodized aluminum C. Execution: 1. Prepare surface to receive expansion joint system in accord with manufacture's product data and with shop drawings. 2. Install expansion joint assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's product data and approved shop drawings. 3. Cover and protect expansion joint cover assemblies from construction traffic. g. END OF DIVISION 07 Thermal & Moisture Protection 010 — DIVO7 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS SECTION 081000 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. General: Provide steel doors and frames and accessories as required for complete installation; coordinate with Section 087100 - door hardware. B. Standards: Comply with steel door institute "standard steel doors and frames" or NAAMM hollow metal manufacturers association "hollow metal manual". 1. Fire rated standards: Fumish materials tested, labeled and inspected per UL, Wamock Hersey, or testing agency acceptable to applicable authorities. C. Submittals: Submit product data. D. Manufacturers: Amweld (1.330.527.4385), Ceco (1.888.232.6366), or Pioneer (1.201.933.1900). E. Hollow metal doors: Flush hollow metal doors full flush type with flush edge; close top at exterior doors. 1. Core: provide steel stiffened core; insulated at exterior doors. 2. Gage: provide min 18 gage at interior doors, min 16 gage at exterior doors. F. Pressed steel (hollow metal) frames: Minimum 16 gage knock -down (field -assembled) frames. G. Fire rated units: Conform to NFPA 80; provide UL or Warnock Hersey labeled doors and frames as required. H. Accessories: Provide door silencers, anchors, and accessories. I. Fabrication: Conform to requirements of SDI or NAAMM. 1. Door silencers: place minimum three single bumpers on single door frames; space equally along strike jambs; place two single bumpers on double door frame heads. J. Prime paint interior units, galvanize and prime paint exterior units; minimum a60 galvanizing; clean, degrease and factory prime paint. K. Installation: Comply with manufacturer recommendations and either SDI or NAAMM standards. 1. Install fire rated units in conformance with fire label requirements and nfpa80. 2. Install doors and frames plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16". SECTION 081400 - WOOD DOORS A. General: Provide wood doors and wood door frames as required for complete installation; coordinate with hardware in Section 087100 Door Hardware. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 B. Standards: Comply with window and door manufacturer's association (WDMA): guide specifications. C. Submittals: Submit manufacturer's literature and shop finished door samples. D. Project conditions: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in accordance with referenced standards requirements applicable to project location E. Warranty: Provide for replacing, rehanging and refinishing wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including warp and delamination; warranty period two years. F. Manufacturers: Algoma (1.800.678.8910), Eggers (1.920.722.6444), or Marshfield (1.800.869.3667). G. Flush solid core doors: Five ply hot press, 1-3/4" thick solid wood framed glued block construction or particleboard core. 1. Conform with WDMA type ii bond, interior; bond stiles and rails to core and sand prior to assembly of face veneers; edges to match face veneer, minimum 1-1/8" thick. 2. Face veneers: premium quality white birch veneers. 3. Edges: stile edges to match face veneer, minimum 1-1/8" thick after trim. H. Wood door frames: Premium grade to match profiles indicated and compatible with wood doors; white birch or poplar for opaque paint finish. I. Fabrication: Fabricate doors in accordance with specified standards; prefit wood doors; shop prepare doors to receive hardware, refer to Section 087100 for hardware requirements and templates; factory machine doors for mortise hardware. J. Bevel strike edge of single -acting doors, 1/8" in 2". K. Shop finish: Provide shop finish on wood doors and frames; premium grade semigloss acrylic finish; color as directed by architect. L. Installation: Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation instructions, and reference standards, plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16". M. Protection: Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure doors are without damage at time of substantial completion. 1. Shop finished doors: refinish or replace doors damaged prior to substantial completion. SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. General: Provide wood doors and wood door frames as required for complete installation; coordinate with hardware in Section 087100. Openings 01 — DIVO8 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 B. Standards: Comply with window and door manufacturer's association (WDMA): guide specifications. C. Submittals: Submit manufacturer's literature and shop finished door samples. D. Project conditions: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in accordance with referenced standards requirements applicable to project location. E. Warranty: Provide for replacing, rehanging and refinishing wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including warp and delamination; warranty period one year. F. Products: Doors 1. Grade: Select or better 2. Finish: White latex primer (field painting by G.C.). 3. Wood species: Exterior door leaves to be 1 15/16" white oak/interior door leaves to be 1 15/16" red oak. 4. Raised panels for opaque finish: panel infill to be 1/2" exterior mdf. G. Glass for openings: Clear 1/4" tempered. H. Wood door frames: Premium grade to match profiles indicated and compatible with wood doors; interior door frames to be red oak/exterior door frames to be white oak for opaque paint finish. 1. Finish: White latex primer (field painting by G.C.). I. Fabrication: Fabricate doors in accordance with specified standards; prefit wood doors; shop prepare doors to receive hardware, refer to Section 087100 for hardware requirements and templates; factory machine doors for mortise hardware. J. Installation: Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation instructions and reference standards, plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16". K. Protection: Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure doors are without damage at time of substantial completion. SECTION 083100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. General: Provide access doors as required for access to valves and controls located behind finished walls and ceilings not otherwise accessible, with accessories for complete installation. 1. Coordinate with various trades for controls and valves which may be concealed. B. Submittals: Fumish product data for each type of access door and panel. C. Manufacturers: Karp associates Inc., Maspeth, N.Y. (718-784-2105); Intex forms Inc., 8880 Elder Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Creek Road, Sacramento, CA 95828 (916-388- 9933) 1. Sales area (non -rated): Intex forms "lift & shift" access panel w/ radius door comers. See ceiling plan for sizes and locations. 2. Sales area (rated): Karp model #KATR prime coated steel with stainless steel cam latch on recessed door. See ceiling plan for sizes and locations. 3. Non -sales area (non -rated): Karp model #dsc-214m. Prime coated steel with stud latch. See ceiling plan for sizes and locations. 4. Non -sales area (rated): Karp model #krp- 150fr prime coated steel with ring tum latch. See ceiling plan for sizes and locations. D. Installation: comply with manufacturer recommendations and applicable requirements for fire ratings. 1. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 2. Adjust hardware and doors after installation for proper operation. 3. Remove and replace doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. SECTION 083326 - OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Aluminum overhead coiling grilles. 1.02 Submittals: See Section 013000 1.03 Summary A. Rolling grille provided and installed by LSD&C. General Contractor to verify grille is true, plumb, and operating properly, before installer leaves premises. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 Manufacturer A. Provided grilles manufactured by metro door inc., 3500 sunrise highway, building 100, suite 210, great river, NY 11739, 800-669-3667 2.02 Models And Materials A. Models: Provided overhead coiling grille model as follows: 1. Perforated metal 2. Lexan glazed B. Materials: 1. Aluminum: bars, rods and extrusions to be 6063 alloy, t5 tempered. 2. Steel: bar, pipe and plate(s) to meet manufacturer's specifications. 2.03 Components Openings 02 — DIVO8 • • VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 A. Locking: Standard locking mechanism to consist of two -point lock to throw at both jambs, with a keyed cylinder on the outside and thumb-tum on the inside. 2.04 Fabrication A. Perforated model curtain: 1. Horizontal rods to consist of extruded aluminum, 7/8"x1/2" horizontal hinge system spaced at 4" on center. 2. Perforated panels to consist of 1/8" aluminum extrusion, with slotted holes at 45 angles, spaced 1/8" on center, to allow 60 percent transparency. 3. Windows to consist of 3/32" clear polycarbonate panels every 32" to horizontal "I" for maximum strength. Windows to be enclosed in horizontal aluminum frame with PVC "h" for quite operation. 4. Curtain size: see drawings B. Guides: Extruded aluminum with mohair strips to prevent metal to metal contact. C. Structural supports: 3x3 or 4x4 steel supports. D. Bottom bar: Heavy duty extruded aluminum with thumb-tum interior and keyed cylinder exterior. E. Counterbalance: Tempered helical torsion high cycle spring mounted on cast anchors and continuous solid torsion rods permanently lubricated and enclosed within a 8" steel pipe shaft. F. Bracket plates: Steel plates 1/4" thick bolted to structural support tubes. G. Operation: Manual up to 120 square feet. For rolling grilles 120 square feet and larger or wider than 12', provide a motor to operate. Coordinate power requirements with MEP drawings. 2.05 Finishes A. Aluminum bottom bar, guides and curtain to be clear bronze or black anodized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Prepare opening(s) to receive grille(s) as required by manufacturer. B. General contractor to supply grille installers with finish floor elevation for proper installation of grille lock as well as precise grille location on floor layout. 3.02 Installation A. Install as shown on drawings in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions adjust for smooth and easy operation. B. Carefully coordinate installation and hook-up of rolling grille with all affected trades. Refer to door schedule. SECTION 083516 - FOLDING GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. B. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Manually- operated folding security grilles. Related sections 1. Section 055000-Metal Fabrications - for miscellaneous steel support brackets and guides. 1.02 References A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association. (AAMA): 1. AAMA 611, voluntary specification for anodized architectural aluminum. B. ASTM intemational: 1. ASTM b 221, standard specification for aluminum and aluminum alloy extruded bars, rods, wire, profiles, and tubes. 1.03 Submittals A. Product data: Manufacturer's printed product information identifying all components, finishes, and options. B. Shop drawings: Show each installation including components not dimensioned or detailed in product data. Include elevations, plans, sections, details, and attachment to other work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Source limitations: Obtain folding metal grilles specified in this section through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.05 Delivery, Storage, and Handling. A. Deliver folding metal grilles in manufacturer's original, undamaged, and unopened containers. Provide identification labels on each container. B. Store folding grilles in locations protected from weather and damage from construction operations. 1.06 Project Conditions A. Field measurements: Verify dimensions of openings where folding grilles are indicated to be installed. Indicate measurements on shop drawings. 1.07 Warranty A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty in which manufacturer agrees to replace hinged panel sections that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers A. Metro door, Inc., 3500 Sunrise Highway, Building 100 Suite 210, Great River, NY 11739 (800) 669-3667. www.metrodoor.com Openings 03 — DIVO8 VICTORIA'S SECRET • Store #: 010500230 SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS A. General: Provide extruded aluminum entrance system with doors, frames, hardware, and accessories as required for complete weathertight installation at exterior locations only. B. Standards: Comply with architectural aluminum manufacturers association (AAMA) "aluminum store front and entrance manual". C. Codes and regulations: comply with applicable codes and regulations. D. Submittals: Furnish manufacturer's literature, shop drawings, and samples. E. Structural certificates: provide certification by state registered engineer indicating system complies with contract documents and applicable codes. F. Special project warranty: Provide for correcting failures including wind damage and water penetration to interior surfaces, excessive deflections, and deterioration of finishes, weatherstripping and accessories. Special warranty period two years. G. Manufacturer: Old Castle Engineered Products, 101 Sage St., Suite A, Terrell, TX 75160, Contact: P (972)551-7714, F (972)551-7720 H. Storefront: Extruded aluminum entrance system as indicated on drawings. 1. Aluminum type: As recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than extruded aluminum, ASTM b221, 6061 or 6063 alloy and t5 or t6 temper. 2. Provide factory formulated polyester TGIC powder coating materials intended for powder coating application custom color as directed by architect. 3. Interior storefront finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodized finish as indicated on drawings. I. Glazing: See Section 088100. J. Glazing Accessories: See Section 088100. K. Miscellaneous materials: 1. Steel reinforcement and brackets: manufacturer's standard with minimum 2 oz. hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM a123, applied after fabrication. 2. Bituminous paint: cold -applied mastic, sspc paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat. 3. Flashing: See Section 076000. 4. Anchoring devices: corrosion resistant type capable of supporting entrance system and superimposed design loads; design to allow adjustments of system prior to being permanently fastened in place. 5. Joint sealants: See Section 079200. L. Fabrication: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront system to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assemblies to Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 enable installation; provide for thermal movement. 1. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof. 2. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint or preformed separators which will prevent corrosion. M. Installation: Install aluminum framed storefront assemblies, including entrances, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to meet design requirements indicated, for weathertight installation. 1. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 2. Use sufficient anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten assemblies to building. 3. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates. Coordinate installation of cylinders with Section 087100. 4. Install sill members and thresholds in bed of compound, joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight construction. 5. Glass installation: comply with GANA glazing manual and glazing manufacturer instructions. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces. SECTION 084114 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS - HURRICANE RESISTANT A. General: Provide extruded aluminum entrance system with doors, frames, hardware, and accessories as required for complete weathertight installation at exterior locations only. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. hurricane - resistant aluminum entrance door, glass & glazing, door hardware, and components 1. Model types of Arch Aluminum entrances include: a. Medium stile swing door and doorframe: 3 1/2" stile width x 1 3/4" depth b. 7/16" laminated door glass c. Miami -Dade County product approval is: Notice of acceptance: 12-0117.05 d. Florida state product approval # 16211.1 2. Type of Arch aluminum -framed storefronts includes: a. Resistor impact series impact wall 3100/13100 - large and small missile: 1 1/4"x 4 1/2" offset to front, interior glazed shear block system for 1-5/16" (nom.) and/or 9/16" (nom.) glazing b. 1-5/16" laminated insulating impact wall glass Openings 04 — DIVO8 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 c. Miami -Dade County, product approval notice of acceptance is: 05-0906.0411- 1117.02 Florida state product approval is # 16181.2 3. "This 'system' is designed to comply with the requirements of the high -velocity hurricane zone of the Florida Building Code (FBC). for locations where the pressure requirements do not exceed the design pressure rating values indicated in the approved drawings, refer to the above referenced NOA drawings and charts for accepted configurations, limits, anchor requirements, and allowable door hardware." B. Standards: comply with architectural aluminum manufacturers association (AAMA) "Aluminum store front and entrance manual." C. Codes and regulations: comply with applicable codes and regulations. D. Submittals: Furnish manufacturer's literature, shop drawings, and samples. E. Structural certificates: Provide certification by state registered engineer indicating system complies with contract documents and applicable codes. F. Special project warranty: Project warranty: refer to division 1 general requirements, work covered by contract documents" for project warranty conditions. Manufacturer's product warranty: submit, for owner's acceptance, manufacturer's product warranty for entrance & storefront systems as follows: 1. Resistor impact door 3000 medium stile large missile, hurricane —resistant entrance door and glass systems shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and/or workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of shipment. 2. The resistor impact series, impact wall 3100/13100 - large and small missile aluminum storefront framing and glass system shall be guaranteed by limited warranty against defects in materials and/or workmanship as defined by manufacturer's published limited warranty for a period of two (2) years from date of shipment. 3. The 1-5/16" laminated insulating impact wall glass shall be guaranteed by limited warranty against defects in materials and/or workmanship as defined by manufacturer's published limited warranty for a period of five (5) years. G. Manufacturer: Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions 8130 NW 74th Avenue, Medley, FL 33166 Contact: John Saud 888-574-0367 ext. 159 H. Aluminum - framed entrances & storefronts 1. Door and frame sections shall conform to the material standards of ASTM b 221; 6063 - t5 alloy & temper Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 2. The door stile and rail profile dimensions for the resistor impact series, impact door 3000 medium stile large missile shall be: a. Vertical stiles: 3 1/2" b. Top rail: 3 1/2" c. Bottom rail: 10" 3. Major portions of the door stiles and rails are to be .125" in nominal thickness. Glazing moldings are to be 0.05" thick. 4. The frame profile dimensions will be: Vertical & horizontal mullions: 1 1/4" x 4 1/2" horizontal mullion for concealed overhead closer: 1 3/4" x 4 1/2". 5. Joint sealant: See Section 079200 I. Glazing: See Section 088100 J. Glazing accessories: See Section 088100 K. Miscellaneous materials: 1. Steel reinforcement and brackets: manufacturer's standard with minimum 2 oz. hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM a123, applied after fabrication. 2. Bituminous paint: cold -applied mastic, SSPC paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat 3. Flashing: See Section 076000 4. Anchoring devices: corrosion resistant type capable of supporting entrance system and superimposed design loads; design to allow adjustments of system prior to being permanently fastened in place. L. Fabrication: fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront system to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assemblies to enable installation; provide for thermal movement. 1. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof. 2. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint or preformed separators which will prevent corrosion. M. Installation: install aluminum framed storefront assemblies, including entrances, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to meet design requirements indicated, for weathertight installation. 1. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 2. Use sufficient anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten assemblies to building. 3. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates. Coordinate installation of cylinders with Section 087100. 4. Install sill members and thresholds in bed of compound, joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight construction. 5. Glass installation: comply with GANA glazing manual and glazing manufacturer Openings 05 — DIVO8 • • VICTORIA'S SECRET • Store #: 010500230 instructions. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces. SECTION 085200 - WOOD WINDOWS A. Summary: Provide primed wood framing window components as required for complete installation. Glazing to be installed at site. B. Performance requirements 1. Engineering design of wood windows by contractor. 2. Basic wind speed: per store location and local codes. C. Quality assurance 1. Quality standard: [AAMA/WDMA 101/1.s.2/NAFS] 2. Mockups for each form of construction. D. Warranty 1. Windows: one year 2. Glazing: See Section 088100 E. Windows 1. Type: wood fixed a. Performance grade: premium 2. Glazing: site glazed: See Section 088100 3. Wood finishes: finish to be white latex primer (field painting by G.C.) SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for hollow metal doors and for wood doors, and provide cylinders for doors provided with hardware, with accessories as required for complete operational door installations. B. Standards: Comply with Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) ANSI/BHMA 156 series standards. C. Codes and Regulations: Comply with state and federal requirements for ensuring access for persons with disabilities. 1. Fire rated doors: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 and applicable codes for fire rated door hardware; provide hardware bearing Underwriters Laboratory (UL) labels. D. Submittals: Furnish shop drawings, product data including keying schedule, and samples of each required style and finish. 1. Supply templates to door and frame manufacturers for proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut-outs for hardware. E. General materials: Provide complete hardware with accessories as required for doors and applications indicated and not provided under other sections. F. Hinges: Hager (1.800.255.3590), Lawrence (1.800.435.9568), McKinney (1.800.346.7707), Stanley (1.800.337.4393) or Baldwin(1.800.566.1986); full mortised butt hinges; size and number as recommended by manufacturer; non -removable pins at exterior out Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 swinging doors, ball -bearing hinges at fire rated doors and doors with closers. G. Locksetsllatchsets: Provide as indicated, as specified in hardware schedule (sheet a00.2), and as required for complete installation. Keying as directed by LSD&C. provide u-change cylinders for doors fumished with locks. U- change customer service: 1-800-253-5625. H. Accessories: Provide door stops, thresholds, weatherstripping, trim, coordinators, and accessories as required for complete operational door installation. 1. Thresholds, stops, trim, and miscellaneous hardware: Provide as indicated, as specified, as included in hardware schedule, and as required for complete installation. 2. Weatherstripping: Provide continuous weatherstripping at top and sides of exterior doors. 3. Fire rated gaskets: Provide continuous fire rated gaskets at top and sides of fire rated doors 4. Through bolts: Through bolts and grommet nuts shall be avoided on door faces in highly visible areas, unless no altemative is possible, as directed and approved, and shall not be used for solid wood core doors. 5. Kick plates: Minimum 0.050" thick, 10" tall, width to be determined by subtracting 1" from door leaf width. I. Finish: BHMA 626 (us26d), satin finished chromium plated unless otherwise indicated. J. Installation: Comply with manufacturer recommendations, BHMA, and applicable for access and for fire ratings. 1. Fit hardware prior to painting, then remove for painting of doors and frames before final installation of hardware. 2. Heights to comply with applicable codes and BHMA recommendations. 3. Hardware groups: refer to drawings A002. SECTION 088100 - GLASS GLAZING A. General: Install glass and film on glass; provide glazing accessories as required for complete installation. B. Standards: Comply with glass association of North America (GANA) "glazing manual". C. Codes: Safety glazing shall comply with consumer product standard 16 cfr 1201, and shall have passed ANSI z97.1. D. Submittals: Fumish product data and samples of exposed glazing materials. E. Manufacturers: Pilkington (1.419.2473731), guardian (1.248.340.1800), or ppg (1.888.774.4332) or approved equal. F. Glazing: ASTM c1048, kind ft, fully tempered select glazing quality clear float glass; nominal 1/2" safety glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interior: 1/2" or 5/8" or 3/4" thick tempered glazing, as indicated on drawings. Openings 06 — DIVO8 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 2. Exterior: 1" tempered insulated with dual seal (makeup: 1/4" clear tempered, 1/2" spacer, 1/4" clear tempered) 3. Exposed and butt edges: eased polished edge 4. Comer edges: lap joint comers with exposed edges polished G. Glazing accessories: Of type recommended by manufacturer to suit security locations and applications for dry glazing installation. 1. Horizontal glass bolt assembly: m14 countersunk bolt assembly with polyacetal gasket and aluminum bushing by EPCO or equal. 2. Mini mall clamp: 1-1/2" wide aluminum clamp installed in 1/4" glazing joints with extended threaded stud for a 1" thick glazing application. H. Windbome-debris-impact resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic protection testing requirements in ASTM e 1996 for appropriate wind zone when tested according to ASTM e 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the project. 1. Large -missile test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. 2. Small -missile test: For glazing located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade. 3. Large -missile test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade. I. Windbome-debris-impact-resistant laminated glass: ASTM c 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for category II materials, with "windbome-debris-impact resistance" paragraph above, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: laminate glass with the following to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations: a. Polyvinyl butyral interlayer. 2. Interlayer thickness: provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer color: clear unless otherwise indicated. J. Glazing film: Provide translucent and/or opaque glazing films by 3m if indicated on drawings. 1. UV protection film: (for exterior locations only) provide mac6000 solar film by Madico, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. (1.800.225.1926) K. Glazing sealant: One component silicone glazing sealant by Dow, GE, or Tremco. L. Setting blocks and spacers: Neoprene or EPDM, silicone compatible where in contact with silicone sealant. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 M. Preparation: Clean glazing channels and framing members to receive glass immediately before glazing; remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrate. N. Installation: Comply with GANA glazing manual and sealant manual and glazing manufacturer instructions. 1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces. 2. Comply with NFPA 80 for glass in fire rated openings. 3. Place setting blocks at quarter points in thin course of sealant. 4. Install removable stops with glass centered in space with spacer shims at 2'-0" intervals on both sides of glass, 1/4" below sightline. 5. Sealant glazing: fill gap between glass and stops with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but not more than 3/8" below sightline. SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. This section includes new wall mounted glass mirrors. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Installer qualifications: an experienced installer who has completed mirror glazing similar in material design and extent to that indicated; whose work has resulted in mirror installations with a record of not less than 5 years of successful in-service performance. Source limitations for mirrors: obtain mirrors from one supplier/manufacturer for each type of mirror indicated. B. Source limitations for glazing accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each type of accessory indicated. C. Glazing publications: Comply with the applicable recommendations of the following. Where recommendations conflict the more stringent shall apply: 1. Glass Association of North America (GANA): "glazing manual" and the mirror division's "mirrors, handle with extreme care: tips for the professional on the care and handling of mirrors." 2. National Glass Association (NGA): "custom mirrors, fabrication and installation." 1.03 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of Openings 07 — DIV08 • VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation. 1.04 Project Conditions A. Environmental limitations: Do not install mirrored glass until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Silvered Flat Glass Mirror Materials A. Clear glass mirrors: 6.0 mm thick and complying with ASTM c 1503, mirror select quality for use in visually demanding applications requiring minimal distortions and blemishes. Reflectivity is similar in appearance to the major surface of the glass. 2.02 Fabrication A. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. B. Mirror edge treatment: 1. Cutting and polishing: a. Typical mirrors: Flat edges where the clean cut "square" edge of the glass is flat and surface edges are slightly arrissed. After grinding the arrisses, edges shall be polished to a high gloss surface where the surface reflectivity is similar in appearance to the major surface of the glass. b. Beveled edged mirrors: Provide beveled edged mirrors where the surface edge of the glass is beveled to width indicated on the owner furnished drawings. The angle formed by the intersection of the plane of the bevel with the major surface face of the glass shall be between 3 to 10 degrees. The beveled surface and the nose of the bevel shall be polished to a high gloss surface where the surface reflectivity is similar in appearance to the major surface of the glass. 2. Edge sealing: Immediately after cutting to final sizes, and applying edge treatment, factory seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 2.03 Miscellaneous Materials A. Mirror safety backing: CRL 24" category ii shatterproof safety tape #2mt24. C.R. Laurence CO., Inc., 2503 E. Vemon Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90058, (800-421-6144). Safety backing is required for all Mirror types in this specification. B. Setting blocks: Non -rubber or non -neoprene based elastomeric material manufactured for setting silvered flat glass mirrors, compatible with adhesive used for placement, with a type A shore Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 1/8" wide x 1/4" high x 4" long. C. Edge sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirror edges. D. Mirror mastic: Palmer "Mirro-Mastic"; Palmer products Corp. (502) 893-3668, (800)431-6151 / fax (502) 895-9253. E. Drywall and plywood primer: Kilz original (oil based primer); Masterchem Industries, Inc. (866)774-6371. Or approved equal. F. Top and bottom aluminum j channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate 6 mm thick mirrors and heavy bodied mirror mastic specified and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. The ends of the back lips of all channels shall be factory snipped and filed so that they will not be seen after installation. 1. Bottom trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8" and 7/8" in height, respectively. CRL polished finish 1/4" standard "J" channel (part number d636p); C. R. Laurence CO., Inc. (800) 421- 6144/ fax (800) 262-3299. 2. Top trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8"and 1-3/16" in height, respectively. CRL polished finish 1/4" deep nose "J" channel (part number d645p); C. R. Laurence CO., Inc. (800) 421-6144/ fax (800) 262-3299. G. Stud fasteners: Provide #6 gage diameter, 1-5/8" long, Phillips bugle head, self -drilling type, fine threaded steel screw fasteners in quantity as required for support and fastening of wood trims and mirror channels to drywall stud framing and sheet metal backer plates. Hilti Kwik-pro self -drill drywall screws, model number 6x 1-5/8 Pbh SD; Hilti, Corporation (800) 879-8000 voice. H. Plastic wood filler: Commercial quality wood filler specifically manufactured to advance the final build and smoothness of the installed wood trim surface by filling dents, scratches, miter joints, and voids above countersunk fastener the selected filler shall be either neutral or tinted to match the color of the wood trim. I. Plywood fasteners: Provide minimum #6 gage diameter, Phillips flat head, sharp pointed, coarse threaded, steel wood screw fasteners in quantity as required. Fumish plywood fasteners in length as required to span through wood mirror trim, and mirror channels, plus 3/4". J. Wood mirror trim (as detailed). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance. Openings 08 — DIVO8 • • VICTORIA'S SECRET • Store #: 010500230 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers. Proceed with mirrored glass installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.02 Preparation A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates. 1. Mirror, drywall and plywood substrates shall be free of dust, be clean, and dry prior to application of mirror mastic and drywall and plywood paint. 2. If plywood or drywall surfaces have been painted prior to application of the specified drywall and plywood paint the existing paint shall be sanded through to the original surface and the substrate cleaned prior to the application of drywall and plywood paint. 3.03 Glazing A. General: Install mirrors with mirror glazing channels to comply with written instructions of mirror and mirror glazing channel manufacturers, with referenced GANA and NGA publications, owner furnished drawings, and as specified. Mount mirrors plumb, in line and in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B. Comply with mastic manufacturer's printed directions for preparation and sealing of mounting surfaces by sealing drywall and plywood, substrates with drywall and plywood paint. Allow paint to dry before applying mirror mastic. C. Mirror safety backing installation: 1. Safety tape application: Tape should be applied with a pressure roller. Surface should be clean and free of oil and moisture. Apply at temperatures between 60°f and 100°f (16°c and 38°c). 2. Mastic application: Per manufacturer's recommendations, use only regular palmer Mirro-Mastic. (Palmer "Qwikset Mirro-mastic" not to be used with plastic safety film.) Safety tape must be washed (two -cloth method) with a 70% isopropyl alcohol (IPA) solution prior to mastic application. D. Mirror channel installation: 1. To plywood: Drill, do not dimple, back lip of channel to receive fasteners with holes properly sized and spaced to receive fasteners. Attach mirror channels by screw attaching mirror channel through the back lip of the channel to plywood substrate in accordance with the fastener manufacturers written instructions. Install the web of the top channel 1/4" higher than the height of the mirror to allow the raising of the mirror into the top channel and its subsequent lowering onto the bottom channel. After installing fasteners place masking tape over the entire Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 length of the back lip of the channel completely covering the fastener heads to protect the mirror from being chipped in setting. Adhere setting blocks at quarter points for bottom mirror channels using only 2 setting blocks per mirror panel. 2. To Drywall: Mark the locations for the stud fasteners on the back lip of each mirror channel at equal intervals not over 8" on center, and not more than 3" from ends prior to drilling the channel. Drill and countersink, do not dimple, back lip of channels to receive stud fasteners at marked locations with holes properly sized to receive stud fasteners. Attach mirror channels by screw attaching mirror channel through the back lip of the channel through drywall, stud framing, and sheet metal backer plate substrates in accordance with the fastener manufacturers written instructions. a. Install the web of the top channel 1/4" higher than the height of the mirror to allow the raising of the mirror into the top channel and its subsequent lowering onto the web of the bottom channel. After installing fasteners place masking tape over the entire length of the back lip of the channel completely covering the fastener heads to protect the mirror from being chipped in setting. Adhere setting blocks to the web of the bottom mirror channels, located at quarter points, using 2 setting blocks per mirror panel. E. Wood trim installation: 1. Before installing mirror wood trim, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. Prime all exposed surfaces of the mirror wood trim which will be in contact with the mirror backing to eliminate interactions between the resins in the wood and the mirror backing. 2. Install mirror wood trim plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Scribe and cut mirror wood trim to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of wood trim available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96" long, except where shorter single -length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints. Miters over 4" long shall be splined and glued. 3. Fasten mirror wood trim through field drilled and counter sunken holes to plywood, stud framing, and sheet metal backer plates previously built into partition substrates. Secure with counter sunk concealed stud fasteners in accordance with the fastener manufacturers written instructions. Using plastic wood filler fill void above heads of Openings 09 — DIVO8 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 counter sunk fasteners full and strike flush with face of the wood trim, sand smooth with 220 grit or finer sandpaper. Fill gaps, if any, at miters with plastic wood filler, sand smooth. 4. adhere setting blocks to mirror glass bearing surface of the mirror wood trim glazing channel (dado), located at quarter points, using 2 setting blocks per mirror panel. F. Mirror installation: Apply mastic in ping pong ball sized spots to the wall, not to the mirror back to avoid potential damage caused by mastic applicator tools in compliance with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage of not Tess than one spot for every square foot of mirror and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. Do not Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 apply mastic within 6" of the mirror edges to prevent squeeze out. Place spots so space will be left between them when the mirror is installed. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8" between back of mirrored glass and mounting surface. Mastic shall spread to a pat approximately 4-1/2" in diameter after pressing mirror into place. 3.04 Protection and Cleaning A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Using clean warm water, clean mirrors by methods recommended in referenced glazing standards. END OF DIVISION 08 Openings 010 — DIVO8 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: 010500230 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Provide gypsum board systems including metal framing accessories, gypsum board, joint treatment, acoustical insulation, acoustical sealant and accessories as required for complete installation standards: comply with ASTM c754 and ASTM c840, and requirements for fire ratings. B. Standards: Comply with ASTM c754 and ASTM c840, and requirements for fire ratings. 1. Deflections: Maximum I/240 typical, 1/360 at locations indicated to receive tile. C. Fire -rated assemblies: Listed by Underwriter's Laboratory, Gypsum Association (GA) file no's in ga-600 fire resistance design manual, or other listing approved by applicable authorities and applicable code requirements. D. Systems responsibility: Provide products manufactured by or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board to maintain single -source responsibility for system. E. Submittals: See Section 013000 F. Manufacturers: USG (1.800.950.3839), Georgia Pacific (1.800.225.6119), National Gypsum (1.740.365.7300), or approved equal. G. Metal framing: Conform to ASTM c754; complete 16 gage and lighter steel framing and suspension system for gypsum board systems; provide accessories as required for complete installation. 1. Install owner fumished recessed studs and standards; provide accessories as required for complete installation. 2. Manufactured suspension system such as Chicago metallic/drywall system is acceptable. H. Gypsum board: Conform to c840; UL listed fire resistant gypsum board throughout. 1. Standard: ASTM c36, 5/8" thick. 2. Core board: ASTM c442, 1" thick. I. Fire rated construction: Comply with Underwriter's Laboratories certified fire tests and applicable code requirements. 1. Provide protective coated steel comer beads and edge trim; type designed to be concealed in finished construction by tape and joint compound. 2. Comer beads: manufacturer's standard metal beads. 3. Reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, fasteners: types recommended by system manufacturer and conforming to ASTM c475. J. Shaft wall system: Provide at shafts and where indicated. K. Acoustical accessories: See Section 098100 L. Installation: Comply with manufacturer recommendations, referenced standards, and applicable requirements for fire ratings and acoustical ratings. 1. Special metal stud and gypsum door: provide special configuration as indicated on drawings M. Metal framing erection: Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM c754 and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction. 2. Door opening framing: install double studs at door frame jambs; install runners on each side of opening at frame head height between jamb studs and adjacent studs. 3. Install metal framing backing where required for support of fixtures, cabinets, accessories and hardware. 4. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing; allow items to be installed after framing is complete. N. Ceiling framing installation: Erect in accordance with ASTM c754 and manufacturer's recommendations. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system. 1. Laterally brace entire suspension system. O. Gypsum board installation: Install in accordance with ASTM c840 and manufacturer's recommendations. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring and to framing. 1. Steel drill screws: ASTM c 1002, unless otherwise indicated. a. Use screws complying with ASTM c 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. b. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. 2. For fire rated systems comply with requirements for fire ratings. 3. Place comer beads at external comers; use longest practical lengths. 4. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 5. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, comers and openings to produce surface ready to receive finishes; feather coats onto adjoining surfaces. 6. Finishing: Comply with Gypsum Association (GA) "levels of gypsum board finish" GA level 4, three coat finishing and sanding is required for surfaces indicated to be painted; provide flush, smooth joints and surfaces ready for applied paint finishes. 7. Remove and replace defective work. P. Recessed wall stud installation sequence 1. Remove rubber filler from standard before recessed wall stud is put in place. 2. Mask tape standard portion of recessed stud for all walls receiving paint or wall covering. Finishes 01 — DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 3. Set recessed studs in wall. 4. Use laser to set consistent height of standard portion of recessed studs. Screw clip in tops and bottoms. (Set insert 7'-0" A.F.F.) 5. Install a bracket on each standard and install rod or shelf to verify that slots are in alignment. 6. Install drywall on recessed wall studs - avoid drywall factory edge against standard (requires excessive mud build up). 7. Flat tape drywall against standard. 8. Sand mud down to standard to avoid excess build up. 9. Apply all finish materials to wall prior to cutting out standard slots. Use razor blades to cut out standard slots - tops and bottoms of all slots must align. Cuts to be made inside of standard slots. SECTION 092950 - GYPSUM BOARD METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. Section includes: 1. Suspension system framing and furring for plaster and gypsum board assemblies 2. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 09200 - Gypsum board 1.02 References A. American society for testing and materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM c 635 standard specification for metal suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay -in panel ceilings. 2. ASTM c 636 recommended practice for installation of metal ceiling suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay -in panels. 3. ASTM c 754 installation of steel framing members to receive screw -attached gypsum board 1.03 Submittals A. See Section 013000 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Single -source responsibility: To ensure proper interface, all drywall furring components shall be produced or supplied by a single manufacturer. B. All accessory components from other manufacturers shall conform to ASTM standards. C. Fire resistance ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in UL fire resistance directory, for types of assemblies in which drywall ceilings function as a fire protective membrane and tested per ASTM e 119. Installation in accordance with the UL design being referenced. D. Coordination of work: Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 1. Coordinate drywall furring work with installers of related work including, but not limited to acoustical ceilings, building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers. 2. All work above the ceiling line should be completed prior to installing the drywall sheet goods. There should be no materials resting against or wrapped around the suspension system, hanger wires or ties. 1.05 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. See Section 016000 1.06 Warranty A. Suspensions system: Submit a written limited warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace grid components that are supplied with a hot -dipped galvanized coating or aluminum base material. Failures include, but are not limited to: the occurrence of 50% red rust as defined by ASTM d 610 test procedures as a result of defects in materials or factory workmanship. B. Warranty period: Grid: Ten years from date of installation. C. The warranty shall not deprive the owner of other rights the owner may have under other provisions of the contract documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the contractor under the requirements of the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers A. Suspension systems: Armstrong world industries, Inc. 2.02 Suspension Systems A. Components: 1. Main beam: Shall be double -web construction (minimum 0.0179 inch prior to protective coating), hot dipped galvanized (per ASTM a653). a. hd8901: 1-1/2 inch web height, prefinished 15/16 inch flange with minimum g40 hot dipped galvanization. 2. Primary cross tees: Shall be double -web steel construction (minimum 0.0179 inch prior to protective coating), hot dipped galvanized (minimum g40 or g90 per ASTM a653), web height 1-1/2 inch with rectangular bulb and pre -finished 1-1/2 inch knurled flange (x18945p,x18965, x18947p). 3. Secondary framing cross tees : Shall be double web steel construction (minimum 0.0179 inch prior to protective coating), hot dipped galvanized (minimum g40, web height 1-1/2 inch rectangular bulb and 15/16 inch flange (x18341). 4. Wall molding: Finishes 02 - D1V09 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 a. Lam-12, 12 foot locking angle molding, 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch with pre- engineered locking tabs punched 8 inches on center, knurled surface, screw stop hem, pre -punched holes in top flange. 5. Clips: a. MBAC - main beam adapter clip b. XTAC - cross tee adapter dip 6. Screws for wallboard application shall be bugle head screws in accordance with thickness of material used. B. Structural classification: 1. Main beam shall be heavy duty per ASTM c 635. 2. Classification can require wires to be closer together for additional loading when used to support double layer gypsum, verticals, slopes, domes, half barrels, circles, soffits, canopies, and step conditions which call for loading or unusual designs and shapes in drywall construction. Using cross tees in the construction of circles, barrels, etc. is common in order to hold the radius. 3. Deflection of fastening suspension system supporting light fixtures, ceiling grilles, access doors, verticals and horizontal loads shall have a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation - General A. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, in compliance with ASTM installation standard, and with applicable codes as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. B. The Armstrong drywall grid system can be installed in interior or exterior applications. C. To secure to metal clips, concrete inserts, steel bar joist or steel deck, use power actuated fastener, or insert. Coordinate placement for hanger wire spaced as required for expected ceiling loads and layout. D. Install hanger wire as required with necessary on center spacing to support expected ceiling load requirements, following local practices, codes and regulations. Provide additional wires at light fixtures, grilles, and access doors where necessary. A pigtail knot shall be used with three tight wraps at top and bottom fastening locations. E. Add additional wire as needed when using compatible clips and accessories. F. Control joints: Roll formed zinc alloy, aluminum, or plastic as required for expansion and contraction as shown on drawings. G. Expansion joints: Roll formed zinc alloy, aluminum, or plastic as required for expansion and contraction as shown on drawings. H. Main beams shall be suspended from the overhead construction with hanger wire, spaced Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 as required for expected ceiling loads, along the length of the main beams. I. Install cross tees at on center spacing as specified by the drywall manufacturer. Typical drywall cross tee spacing: 1. 24 inches on center with 5/8 inch gypsum board J. Other items such as wood, sheet metal, or plastic panels should be screwed to comply with deflection limit equivalent to that of the ceiling installation. K. For light fixtures (type g, type f) use secondary framing cross tees as required to frame opening. PART 4 - 4.01 Installation - Interior Applications A. Install main beams and cross tees at the on center spacing required for ceiling loading, and location of in -ceiling services. B. Additional bracing as required by code. SECTION 093000 — TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and division 01 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02 Summary A. Section includes application of agglomerate tile, natural stone tile, and ceramic / porcelain tile in interior conditions for walls and floors 1.03 Submittals A. No submittals shall be required. B. No substitutions will be allowed. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. All installation and preparation materials including but not limited to; setting bed/adhesive, moisture mitigation, crack repair, filling, and leveling, shall be provided from a single manufacturer. To determine which manufacturer's products to use begin with section 2.4 of this specification. B. Installer qualifications: tile fabricator, specializing in installation of tile, mosaics, pavers, trim units and thresholds with five (5) years documented experience with installations of similar scope, materials and design. 1. Installer to have completed a certified tile installation program similar to TCAA'Trowel of Excellence", TCNA "Five Star" or other equivalent recognized installation program. C. Installation system manufacturer company specializing in adhesives, mortars, grouts and/or other installation materials with ten (10) years minimum experience and ISO 9001 certification. 1. All setting materials shall be from a single source and comply with manufacturer warranty requirements. Finishes 03 — DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 2. Manufacturer of setting materials shall provide a 25-year systems (labor & materials) warranty. See specific warranty information as provided by manufacturer. 1.05 Delivery, Storage, and Handling: Refer to Section 016000 1.06 Sequencing and Scheduling A. Coordinate installation of tile work with related work. B. Proceed with tile work only after curbs, vents, drains, piping, and other projections through substrate have been installed and when substrate construction and framing of openings have been completed. 1.07 Project Conditions A. Temperature requirements for interior tile: 1. Do not set when air, ambient, material, and/or substrate temperature is below 45°f or above 90°f (4°c - 35°c) 2. Maintain temperature at 50°f or above but less than 90°f (4°c - 35°c) in installation areas during installation and for 7 days after completion unless higher temperatures are required by fabricator's or supplier's instructions. a. Protect Portland cement based mortars and grouts from direct sunlight, radiant heat, forced ventilation (heat & cold) and drafts until cured to prevent premature evaporation of moisture. b. Epoxy mortars and grouts require surface temperatures between 60°f and 90°f (16°c and 32°c) at time of installation. 3. Prevent carbon dioxide damage to tile, mosaics, pavers, trim, and thresholds, as well as adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials, by venting temporary heaters to the exterior. 4. Provide ventilation and protection of environment as recommended by mfg. B. Moisture requirements for interior the: 1. Perform the following test to determine moisture level of substrate. The test results shall be provided to the LSD&C pm prior to sub floor preparation. a. Test slab for relative humidity with a probe test complying with ASTM f-2170. If the value is above 75% then moisture mitigation is required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 National Accounts A. The Mapei or Laticrete products listed throughout this specification shall be purchased by the GC through the following national account, unless otherwise noted. 1. Mapei: Pro -Tile, 914.665.0654 Place order as a Victoria's Secret or Pink Store. Material Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 will be provided from the nearest Mapei Distribution Center. 2. Laticrete: Daltile, contact Dave Meyers, aticrete national account representative 203.376.8113. Place order as a Victoria's secret or pink store. Material will be provided from the nearest Laticrete distribution center. B. All other products listed which are the responsibility of the GC shall be purchased through local resources. 2.02 Tile A. Tile supplied by LSD&C vendor as specified in the finish schedule and plans. 2.03 Surface Preparation A. Moisture mitigation 1. A moisture mitigation barrier shall be provided when the substrate relative humidity exceeds the allowable limits per section 1.7.b of this specification. 2. If moisture mitigation is required, the concrete substrate must be prepared by shot-blasting to achieve a surface profile between csp-3 and csp-6 as per icri standards prior to installation of moisture mitigation. 3. Manufacturer: subject to compliance with requirements, provide following product a. Mapei Corp: Planiseal VS fast b. Laticrete intemational: Laticrete 312 vapor reduction membrane B. Bonding agent 1. A bonding agent shall be provided prior to installation of any self -leveling underlayment only when a moisture mitigation barrier is required. 2. Manufacturer: subject to compliance with requirements, provide following product: a. Mapei Corp: ECO Prim Grip (applied over Planiseal VS fast) b. Laticrete intemational: Laticrete NXT primer (applied over 312 vapor reduction membrane - refer to Laticrete issued warranty) C. Large fill areas and leveling 1. Refer to Section 039250. D. Patching, ramping, and small fill areas 1. Refer to Section 039250. 2.04 Thin -Set Mortar Materials A. Agglomerate resin tile: supplier to supply data to the owner on the moisture sensitivity of the tile. The appropriate classification shall be determined and labeled within the finish schedule. This classification shall be used to determine the proper setting materials. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide following product a. For class "a", "b", or "c" material: two- part polymer modified rapid -setting Finishes 04 — DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 flexible tile mortar complying with ANSI a118.4 and ISO 13007 c2fs2p2: 1. Mapei Grani Rapid System. B. Natural stone tile: Supplier shall provide data to the owner on the water sensitivity of the stone. The appropriate classification shall be determined and labeled within the finish schedule. This classification shall be used to determine the proper setting materials. 1. For class "A" stone: provide following product that meets or exceeds requirements of ANSI a118.4 and ISO 13007 c2teslpl a. Premium polymer modified thin set mortar for installation of large format tile: 1. Mapei Corp, Ultra Flex LFT 2. For class "B" and class "C" stone: provide following product that meets or exceeds requirements of ANSI al 18.4 and ISO 13007 c2fs2p2 a. Two-part polymer modified rapid -setting flexible tile mortar: 1. Mapei Corp: Grani Rapid System C. Ceramic / Porcelain Tile: 1. Tile up to 15" x 15" use professional grade polymer modified rapid setting thin set mortar complying with ANSI al 18.4 and ISO 13007 c2ep1: Mapei corp. Ultraflex 2 RS or Laticrete 4-xlt rapid 2. Tile larger than 15" x 15" use premium polymer modified rapid setting thin set mortar for installation of large format tile complying with ANSI a118.4 and ISO 13007 c2teslp1: Mapei corp. Ultraflex LFT RS or Laticrete 4-xlt rapid 2.05 Grout A. High -hydrated cement grout that is fast setting, color consistent, non -shrinking, and efflorescence free conforming to ANSI a118.7 and ISO 13007 cg2wa, for joints of 1/16"-1" wide. 1. Interior horizontal and vertical locations: conform to ANSI a118.6 and ISO 13007 cg2wa. Refer to finish schedule for actual manufacturer and color required for each tile type. a. Mapei Corp; ultra color plus, sanded. 1. Custom grout colors will be supplied by owner. b. Custom building products; prism, sanded. c. Laticrete; Laticrete 1600, unsanded. d. Bostik 2. Install all grout in compliance with ANSI A108.6. 3. All grout to be un-sanded unless otherwise noted. 4. All grout joints to be 1/16" unless otherwise noted. 2.06 Accessories A. Expansion joint cover assemblies: refer to Section 079513 Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 B. Transition strips: aluminum or zinc strips as specified in drawings and details. C. Cleaner tile cleaner specifically formulated for specified tile as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use any cleaning compounds that are not recommended by the manufacturer. 2.07 Floor Sealer A. Provide floor tile and grout sealer as follows: 1. Floor sealer is required for all natural stone. 2. Grout sealer colorless, slip and stain resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of tile surfaces, as recommended by grout manufacturer for application indicated. Use a water -based sealer, no solvents. 3. Agglomerate tile: tile floor sealer is only required when specifically instructed within the supplier's documentation. 4. Ceramic and porcelain tile shall not require a sealer. B. Colorless, slip and stain resistant sealer that does not alter color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated. C. Acceptable products: miracle sealants 511 h20 plus water base penetrating sealer or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive tile, with installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Verify that surfaces to be covered are: 1. Sound, rigid and conform to good design/engineering practices. 2. With maximum deflection under all live, dead and impact loads, including concentrated loads, of I/720. 3. Clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance, efflorescence, form oil or loose plaster, paint and scale. 4. Level and true to within 1/8" in 10' (6mm in 3m), and no more than 1/16" in 1' (1.5mm in 0.3m) variation from substrate high points. 5. Not leveled with gypsum or asphalt based compounds. 6. Dry as per ASTM d4263. 7. Test slab for moisture limitations as per section 1.7.b. of this specification. B. Concrete surfaces shall be: 1. Cured min. of 28 days at 70°f (21°c). 2. Wood float finished, or better conforming to csp-3 as per ICRI standards. 3. Advise LSD&C project manager of any surface or substrate conditions requiring correction before tile work commences. Beginning of work constitutes acceptance of substrate or surface conditions. Finishes 05 - DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 Preparation A. Vacuum clean or sweep substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair setting bond, including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance. C. Shot -blast substrate when required per section 2.3 of this specification; coordinate shot blast requirements with Section 039250 concrete resurfacing when required as preparation for installation of self -leveling underlayments. D. Profile substrate per manufacturer's recommendation as notated in applicable datasheets and warranties. E. Clean any dirty or stained surfaces on the tile scheduled to be installed by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. 1. Clean by thoroughly scrubbing w/ fiber brushes and drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds containing no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. 3.03 Installation A. Comply with tile council of North America (TCNA) handbook, ANSI a108 tile installation specifications, and manufacturer's instructions. B. Substrate requirements: 1. Floor surfaces: concrete 2. Platform surfaces: cement bonded particle board 3. Wall surfaces: cement backer board 4. Ceilings and soffits: glass mesh mortar units C. Place tile in accordance with patterns indicated on drawings; carefully plan layouts, ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one surface to the next and through doorways unless otherwise noted. D. All tile >15" dimension must be back buttered prior to setting tile in troweled mortar ribs. Note that natural stone thickness tolerance is 6/64" (2mm), and may require additional back buttering. Back buttering must be a consistent thickness layer between 1/16-1/8"; no dabs or spots of mortar allowed. 3.04 Movement Joints A. Minimum 1/4" gaps shall be maintained at all perimeter walls and at all column enclosures. This gap must be obscured completely by the wall base material. 3.05 Waterproof membrane: refer to Section 071416 3.06 Adjusting and cleaning A. Tile to be replaced if installed improperly and not in accordance with these specifications and manufacturers instructions. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 B. In -progress cleaning: clean tile as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Clean tile after setting and grouting are complete per mfgs recommendations. 3.07 Protection A. Prohibit traffic from installed tile per the mfgs instructions for setting adhesive. SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. This section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.02 Submittals: See Section 013000 1.03 Quality Assurance A. Acoustical testing agency qualifications: an independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory. B. Fire -test -response characteristics: 1. Fire -resistance characteristics: where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM e 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface -burning characteristics: acoustical tiles complying with ASTM e 1264 for class [a] materials, when tested per ASTM e 84. a. Smoke -developed index: 450 or less. C. Seismic standard: comply with the following: 1. Standard for ceiling suspension systems requiring seismic restraint: comply with ASTM e 580. 2. CISCA's recommendations for acoustical ceilings: comply with CISCA's "recommendations for direct -hung acoustical tile and lay -in panel ceilings —seismic zones 0-2." 3. CISCA's guidelines for systems requiring seismic restraint: comply with CISCA's "guidelines for seismic restraint of direct - hung suspended ceiling assemblies —seismic zones 3 & 4." 4. UBC standard 25-2, "metal suspension systems for acoustical tile and for lay -in panel ceilings." 5. ASCE 7, "minimum design loads for buildings and other structures": section 9, "earthquake loads." D. Mockups: See Section 014000. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of substantial completion. Finishes 06 — DIV09 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 E. Preinstallation conference: conduct conference at project site. 1.04 Extra materials A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical ceiling units: quantity of 10 full- size tiles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acoustical tile ceilings, general A. Acoustical tile standard: comply with ASTM e 1264. B. Metal suspension system standard: comply with ASTM c 635. C. Attachment devices: size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM c 635, table 1, "direct hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in concrete: expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM e 488 or ASTM e 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 2. Power -actuated fasteners in concrete: fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per astm e 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Wire hangers, braces, and ties: zinc -coated carbon -steel wire; ASTM a 641/a 641m, class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (astm c 635, table 1, "direct hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. E. Seismic struts and seismic clips. F. Metal edge moldings and trim: type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.02 Acoustical tiles for acoustical tile ceiling A. Available products: subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Provide the Product indicated within the Finish Schedule of the Construction Documents. C. Classification: provide tiles (or fire -resistance rated tiles as required) complying with ASTM e 1264 for type and form as indicated: D. Color as indicated on drawings. E. Light reflectance: ASTM e 1477; white panel: light reflectance:0.83 F. Noise reduction coefficient: ASTM c 423; classified w/ UL label on product carton, 0.50 G. Coiling attenuation class: ASTM c 1414; classified with UL label on product carton, 30 H. Articulation class: ASTM e 1111; classified with UL label on product carton N/A I. Edge/joint detail: beveled tegular (only for sales area). J. Thickness: as indicated on drawings. K. Modular size: as indicated on drawings. 2.03 Metal suspension system for acoustical tile ceiling A. Available products: subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Provide the Product indicated within the Finish Schedule of the Construction Documents. C. Direct -hung (or fire -rated as required) suspension system: intermediate or heavy-duty structural classification as required. D. Access: downward, with each access unit identified by manufacturer's standard unobtrusive markers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Comply with ASTM c 636, UBC standard 25-2 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and cisca's "ceiling systems handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less - than -half -width tiles at borders. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire -resistance -rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. Finishes 07 — DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs [ or to steel roof deck. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter comers accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile -to -tile joints are closed by double lap of material 3.02 Adjusting and Cleaning A. Replace damaged and broken panels. B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace mark that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. SECTION 095323 - STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Components A. Comply with ASTM c 754 for conditions indicated. B. Tie wire: ASTM a 641/a 641m, class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch diameter wire. C. Hanger attachments to concrete: as follows: 1. Anchors: fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a Toad equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to astm e 488 by a qualified testing independent testing agency. D. Hangers: as follows: 1. Wire hangers: ASTM a 641/a 641m, class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, and 0.162 inch diameter. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 2. Rod hangers: ASTM a 510, mild carbon steel. a. Diameter 1/4 inch. b. Protective coating: ASTM a 153/a 153m, hot -dip galvanized. 3. Flat hangers: commercial -steel sheet, ASTM a 653/a 653m, g40, hot -dip galvanized. a. Size: 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. 4. Angle hangers: ASTM a 653/a 653m, g60, hot -dip galvanized commercial -steel sheet. E. Carrying channels: cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2 inch wide flange, with ASTM a653/a 653m, g40, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. F. Furring channels (furring members): commercial - steel sheet with ASTM a 653/a 653m, g40, ho-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Hat -shaped, rigid furring channels: ASTM a 645, 7/8 inch deep, with minimum base metal thickness of 0.0179 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within the ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective methods. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire - tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Secure rod or flat hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fumish cast -in - Finishes 08 — DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: 010500230 place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. B. Installation tolerances: 1. Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to with 1/8" in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. C. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. D. Wire -tie furring channels to supports. E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spaces indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 1. Wire hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying channels (main runners): 48 inches O.C. 3. Furring channels (furring members): 16 inches O.C. SECTION 096429 - WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING A. General: Provide shop finished pre-engineered wood strip flooring system with accessories as required for complete finished installation. Engineered wood plank flooring, owner fumished, unless otherwise indicated. B. Submittals: See Section 013000. C. Project conditions: Prior to installation of any flooring, GC must ensure that the jobsite and sub -floor meet the requirements of the manufacturer's warranty and the following instructions. 1. G.C. to perform moisture test on all concrete floors as directed by NWFA. Moisture content of wood sub -floor must not exceed 12% and concrete moisture content must not exceed 15 lbs. of Myer per 1000 SF per 24 hours (ASTM 1869). D. If moisture content is under the limits in C.1 above, and floor has little to moderate patching and leveling requirements, use Adhesive Installation program outlined in E.,below: When Moisture conditions exceed Item C.1 above and/or demolished slab conditions require substantial leveling, LSD&C Project Manager may authorize the altemate installation of wood strip flooring over 5/8" CDX plywood subflooring — See F. below: E. ADHESIVE INSTALLATION: 1. Contact Mapei representative to schedule their onsite evaluation of conditions. 2. Adhesive: Mapei Ultrabond eco 995; apply with clip -on trowel attachment provided w/ adhesive (use a fresh attachment w/ each bucket - do not re -use). Key adhesive to floor surface and strike trowel ridges perpendicular to plank direction, maintaining trowel at 60 - 90 degrees to floor 3. G.C. to install vapor barrier only if required by Mapei rep after onsite evaluation. Mapei adhesive program does not generally require one. Base bid should not include vapor barrier - it will be an add, if required. 4. G.C. to provide moisture test report to LSD&C PM immediately after demolition and/or 1 week prior to floor installation. If the G.C. fails to provide report, any floor failure attributed to moisture, it will be the responsibility of the G.C. to replace (labor and material). 5. All work involving water or moisture should be completed before floor installation. 6. Room temperature and humidity of installation area should be consistent with normal, year-round conditions for at least a week before installation. Room temperature of 60 to 70 degrees f and humidity range of 40% to 60%. 7. G.C. to store flooring at installation site for a minimum of 72 hours before installation to allow flooring to adjust to room temperature and humidity. Do not store directly on concrete or near outside walls. GC to perform moisture test to ensure wood is acclimated. 8. Preparation: Broom clean substrate surface and ensure floor surface is smooth and flat to plus or minus 1/8" per 10'-0", free of oil, grease, dust and foreign substance. Use latex filler to patch cracks and small holes, and for minor leveling. Grind concrete where ridges and irregularities provide unsatisfactory substrate for wood strip flooring. Buff concrete with an 80 grit screen, then vacuum and wipe thoroughly with lacquer thinner. 9. Additional floor prep: See Section 039250 10. Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of conditions. Follow all other spacing, alignment, and finishing instructions in section G., below. F. ALTERNATE PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR INSTALLATION 1. Comply with wood strip flooring manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for applying over plywood subfloor. Finishes 09 — DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 2. 5/8" CDX Plywood to be installed with recommended Vapor barrier with PAFs at recommended spacing and slab penetration. 3. Toe -nail strip flooring into plywood with recommended fasteners at required spacing. Follow all other spacing, alignment, and finishing instructions in section G., below. G. INSTALLATION: Comply with manufacturer and NWFA recommendations and installation instructions for direct application of wood strip flooring over concrete (Adhesive Method) or on plywood subfloor, as appropriate: 1. Inspect flooring material for correct type, quantity and damage. 2. Provide at least 1/2" expansion space between flooring and all walls and vertical objects. 3. Ensure joints of wood flooring are in line; ensure full adhesive contact for permanent bond to substrate. 4. Lay flooring symmetrical about room center line; fit neatly to vertical interruptions. 5. Stagger random length furring such that board ends are a min. 8" from ends of adjacent planks. Maximize long boards in center of sales area. Use short boards under cashwrap location. Take time to look at the flooring as it is being staggered to avoid repeating patterns in boards and h joints. Look for any cracks, ups and downs, boards that are not flat to the concrete and repair immediately. 6. All boards that are cut should be hand beveled or dragged, and colored to match other flooring boards using bleed kit supplied with the flooring. 7. Boards that meet perpendicular or at any other angle are to be tongue and grooved together. 8. Provide divider strips where flooring terminates with tile or other floor finishes. Divider strips manufacturer. Manhattan American terrazzo strip company, P.O box 72433 old 421 road, Staley, North Carolina, 27355, (336)622-4247; fax: (336) 622-4160, matsnsOaol.com 9. Provide maximum 1:8 slope where finished floor surface changes level between wood flooring and adjacent flooring. 10. FOR ADHESIVE SYSTEM ONLY: a. Clean all adhesive off the finished flooring with mineral spirits making sure not to rub too aggressively which could damage the finish and/or remove the color from the flooring. b. Utilize Mapei provided open tack time charts. c. Roll and weight flooring installation per wood plank mfr recommendations, to Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 ensure full contact. Avoid foot traffic after installation for at least 24 hours. d. Contact Mapei representative to comply with national account warranty program and insure that installation meets conditions of their warranty. Mapei will coordinate with GC when their rep will visit site to confirm conditions and preparations. Mapei Americas U.S.A.,1144 e. Newport center road, Deerfield Beach, FL 33442. Contact: Mike Granatowski (949) 212-2363, mgranatowski@mapei.com SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING A. General: Provide resilient sheet flooring with accessories as required for complete finished installation. B. Submittals: See Section 013000. C. Project conditions: ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0'; ensure concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing and dusting. D. Vinyl sheet flooring: Nominal 0.080" thick vinyl sheet conforming to FS I-f-475, type ii, grade a.; color as indicated, as selected by architect from manufacturer's full range of colors where not otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong (1.800.442.4212), Lonseal (1.800.832.7111), VPI floor products. (1.920.458.4664), or approved equal. 2. Flammability: 0.45 watts/sq.cm. or higher, ASTM e648. E. Edge strips and accessories: Rubber or vinyl edge strips matching resilient flooring. F. Concrete preparation: Refer to Section 039250 G. Waterproof membrane: Refer to Section 071416 H. Primers and adhesives: Waterproof nontoxic types as recommended by flooring manufacturer for specified material and application. I. Sealer and wax: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer for material type and location. J. Preparation: Conform to ASTM f710 and manufacturer's recommendations for preparation; remove subfloor ridges and bumps; fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and defects with subfloor filler. K. Installation: Comply with flooring and base manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions; set flooring in place, press with heavy roller for full adhesion; scribe to walls, columns, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 1. Lay flooring with minimum seams with pattem parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattem; terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where Finishes 010 — DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 adjacent floor finish is dissimilar, install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges. L. Integral cove base: Provide integral coved base including cove support strip or filler and metal top edge strip; install top edge strip level with floor line, with tightly butted joints, mitered comers; use longest top edge pieces available, minimum 48" between joints. M. Cleaning: Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces. SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING A. General: Provide resilient tile flooring system and resilient base, with accessories as required for complete finished installation. B. Submittals: See Section 013000 C. Project conditions: Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0'; ensure concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing and dusting. D. Resilient tile: 12" by 12" by 1/8" thick; vinyl composition tile conforming to ASTM f1066, composition 1; color and pattern as indicated, as selected by architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns where not otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong world industries (1.800.442.4212), Inc.; Azrock industries, Inc.; Tarkett Inc. (1.800.877.8453), or approved equal. 2. Flammability: provide materials tested under ASTM e648, flooring radiant panel test, with results of 0.45 watts/cm2 or higher 3. Slip resistance: provide materials tested under ASTM d2047, James slip test with minimum 0.6 rating for floors. E. Resilient base: FS ss-w-40, 1/8" gage coved base at hard floor surfaces, straight (top set) base at carpet; provide molded end stops and extemal comers. 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong (1.800.442.4212), Azrock, or Tarkett, vinyl base. (1.800.877.8453) 2. Height 4" unless otherwise indicated. 3. Color: as indicated on finish schedule. F. Edge strips and accessories: Rubber or vinyl edge strips matching resilient flooring; latex - modified Portland cement based underlayment and patching compound; nontoxic water resistant type adhesives. Install where edge of tile would otherwise be exposed; butt to flooring without gaps; set in adhesive G. Concrete preparation: Refer to Section 039250 H. Waterproof membrane: Refer to Section 071416 I. Primers and adhesives: Waterproof nontoxic types as recommended by floor in install minimum 1/2 tile at room and area perimeter; terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar; install edge strips at unprotected and exposed edges where flooring terminates. J. Sealer and wax: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer for material type and location. K. Preparation: Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for preparation and with ASTM f710; remove subfloor ridges and bumps; fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and defects with subfloor filler. L. Flooring installation: Conform to manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions; set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion; scribe flooring to walls, columns, and other appurtenances, to produce tight joints. 1. Install minimum 1/2 tile at room and area perimeter, terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar; install edge strips at unprotected and exposed edges where flooring terminates. M. Base installation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions; apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Miter intemal comers; use premolded sections for extemal comers and exposed ends; scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. N. Cleaning: Clean, seal and wax floor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION 096800 - CARPETING A. General: Install owner furnished carpet; provide carpet accessories as required for complete finished installation. B. Standards: Comply with carpet and rug institute (cri) standards. 1. Flammability: 0.45 watts/sq.cm. Or higher, ASTM e648. C. Submittals: See Section 013000 D. Installer qualifications: Approved by carpet manufacturer; upon request, submit letter from carpet manufacturer stating installer is acceptable. E. Owner fumished unless otherwise indicated. F. Adhesive: Nontoxic type recommended by carpet and underlay manufacturers to suit application and expected service. G. Concrete preparation: Refer to Section 039250 H. Edge strips: Vinyl or rubber; manufacturer's standard colors as selected. Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions I. Preparation: Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances Finishes 011 — DIV09 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet; allow floors to thoroughly dry. 1. Use leveling and ramping material to patch cracks, small holes, leveling and for ramping to provide finished carpet within 1/2" of adjacent flooring materials. J. Carpet installation: Install carpet in accordance with carpet manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions. 1. Prime substrate if required and as recommended by manufacturer; spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. 2. Apply only enough adhesive for proper adhesion of carpet before initial set. K. Carpet shields: G.C. to provide carpet shield to protect carpet immediately after carpet installation: Surface Shield Inc., (800) 913-5667 SECTION 097216 - VINYL -COATED FABRIC WALL COVERINGS A. General: provide prefinished glass fiber reinforced polyester resin fabricated wall panels, with trim pieces and accessories as required for complete installation B. Submittals: See Section 013000. C. Maintenance instructions: See Section 017000. D. Manufacturers: As indicated on finish schedule. E. Types: as indicated on finish schedule. F. Adhesive for application over glossy surfaces: Vinyl over vinyl (VOV) 1. Manufacturers: Roman Decorating Products, Pro-555 Adhesive (www.romandecoratingproducts.com, Tel: 708-891-0770) or approved equal. 2. Adhesive shall meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Adhesive type: Modified starch and synthetic based polymer b. Percent solids: Approximately 59 percent c. Viscosity: Approximately 17,000cps. d. VOC: Less than 15 g/I (grams per liter); low VOC, LEED, CHPS compliant. e. Coverage: 160 square feet per gallon. f. Covering compatibility: Suitable for covering by non -permeable wall coverings G. Adhesive for regular application: 1. Manufacturers: Roman Decorating Products, Heavy Duty Clear Pro-838 adhesive (www.romandecoratingproducts.com, Tel: 708-891-0770), or Zinsser, Sure Grip: 128 Heavy Duty Clear Adhesive. 2. Adhesive shall meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Adhesive type: Modified starch b. Percent solids: Approximately 21 percent c. Viscosity: Approximately 29,000cps. Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 d. VOC: Less than 25 g/I (grams per liter) e. Coverage: 280 square feet per gallon. f. Substrate compatibility: Suitable for installation over Pro-935 primer Covering compatibility: Suitable for covering by non -permeable wall coverings H. Provide primer which allows removal of wall covering from gypsum board without damaging paper facing of board, and without premature separation of wall covering from wall. Primer to be non -staining and non -toxic, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. No primer needed when installing vinyl over vinyl (VOV). I. Examination: Ensure surfaces to receive wall covering are clean, true and free of irregularities, do not commence with work until surfaces are satisfactory. Ensure wall surface flatness tolerance does not vary more than 1/8" in 10'-0", nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16" per running foot. J. Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations; fill nicks, gouges and other minor imperfections of substrates with latex filler; sand smooth, flush with surface; apply prime coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. K. Adhesive Application: Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation recommendations including the following: 1. Apply when room temperature is above 50 degrees F. 2. Dilution: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Apply one even, thin coat of adhesive with a brush or roller, free from ridges. 4. Remove excess adhesive with clean water before adhesive is dry. 5. If excess adhesive has been allowed to dry: use Romans Piranha concentrate removal liquid, applied per manufacturer's written instructions. L. Wallcovering Application: Handle and apply wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions; mix and apply adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Use panels in exact order as cut from rolls; use rolls in consecutive order as numbered by manufacturer. 2. Horizontal seams and cutting at comers are not acceptable; cut no doser than 2" of an inside comer, and not closer than 6" of an outside comer. 3. Fill spaces above & below windows, doors, and sim. areas in sequence from roll. 4. Install in pattern as provided by manufacturer or as indicated in drawings. 9• Finishes 012 — DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 SECTION 097216.16 - RIGID -SHEET VINYL WALL COVERINGS (F.R.P. PANELS) A. General: Provide prefinished glass fiber reinforced polyester resin fabricated wall panels, with trim pieces and accessories as required for complete installation. B. Panels: Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panel system; nominal 0.090" thickness; white; embossed finish. 1. Fire -rating: Class I (UL class A), maximum 25 flame spread, 450 smoke density based on ASTM e84 installation. C. Trim pieces: mfg's standard matching moldings and trim pieces as required for complete, finished installation, and as required for joints, comers and panel edges. D. Adhesive: manufacturer's recommended nontoxic, waterproof adhesive suitable for substrates indicated. E. Primer; provide non -staining release coat primer as recommended by wall panel manufacturer where panels are applied to gypsum board. F. Mechanical fasteners: concealed type only; types as recommended by system manufacturer. G. Installation: comply with manufacturer recommendations and applicable requirements for fire ratings. Cope and miter trim pieces. Install panels in maximum size increments available. 1. Install wall paneling before installation of plumbing, bases, hardware, and similar accessories. 2. Securely adhere panels to wall surfaces; use blind nailing methods as required to support panels until adhesive dries; exposed mechanical fasteners shall not be acceptable. H. Cleaning: remove excess adhesive from edges; wipe seam clean with dry cloth towel. SECTION 098100 - ACOUSTICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. Glass fiber acoustical insulation for interior walls, floors and ceilings. 1.02 References A. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM) 1. E84 test method for surface burning characteristics 2. E90 laboratory measurement of airborne sound transmission loss of building partitions and elements 3. E96 test method for water vapor transmission of materials 4. E136 test method for behavior of materials in a vertical tube fumace at 750 degrees f. (unfaced) Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 5. C423 test method for sound absorption and the sound absorption coefficient by the reverberation room method 6. C665 standard specification for mineral fiber blanket insulation for light frame construction and manufactured housing. 1.03 Submittals: See Section 013000 1.04 Delivery, storage and handling: See Section 016000 1.05 Limitations A. Do not use unfaced insulation in exposed applications where there is potential for skin contact and irritation. B. Kraft facings will burn and must not be left exposed. The facing must be in substantial contact with the unexposed surface of the ceiling, wall or floor finish. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturer A. Owens Coming 2.02 Quietzone acoustic batt insulation A. Type I: Unfaced glass fiber insulation complying with ASTM c 665 and ASTM e 136. B. Type II: Kraft faced glass fiber insulation complying with ASTM c 665. C. Surface burning characteristics 1. Unfaced insulation a. Maximum flame spread: 10 b. Maximum smoke developed:10 2. Kraft faced insulation a. Maximum flame spread: not rated b. Maximum smoke developed: not rated D. Combustion characteristics: Unfaced insulation passes ASTM e 136 test. E. Dimensional stability: Linear stability less than 0.1%. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. Verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready. Verify that electrical and mechanical services within walls have been inspected and tested. Verify that project drawings comply with installation requirements. B. Provide written report listing conditions detrimental to the performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved. 3.02 Installation A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. B. Between metal studs: Friction -fit unfaced insulation between studs after cover material has been installed on one side of the cavity. When Finishes 013 — DIV09 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 faced insulation is used, attach flanges to face or side (preferred) of stud every 8 to 12 inches to hold in place. 1. Place acoustical insulation tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. C. Acoustical accessories: 1. Place acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter, at base layer and face layer of gypsum board, and penetrations of partitions. 2. Tolerance: maximum 1/4" space between gypsum board at floor, ceiling and penetrations. 3. Install electrical box pads with pads molded and pressed on back side of box, closing openings, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for complete acoustical barrier. 3.03 Installation- Vapor Retarder A. This insulation is for interior wall use only. B. The Kraft paper for this product is not a vapor retarder. C. Not recommended for exterior walls. 3.04 Material Storage and Protection A. Protect insulation from damage and getting wet before, during and after installation SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING A. General: Provide painting of exposed items and surfaces not prefinished, as required for complete finished installation. B. Surfaces not to be painted: prefinished items; concealed and inaccessible areas, code -required labels. C. Standards: Provide materials approved for use by applicable air quality management district for limitations of volatile organic compounds for architectural coatings D. Submittals: See Section 013000 1. Duplicate painted finishes of approved samples on actual wall surfaces and components for approval prior to commencing work. E. Delivery: See Section 016000 F. Manufacturers: Benjamin Moore (330-353-3850), PPG (614-207-1105), or Sherwin-Williams (614- 472-2520). G. Material quality: Provide top line quality commercial grade (professional painter) paints; materials not bearing manufacturer's identification as a best -grade product shall not be acceptable. Manufacturer substitutions of any paint finish will not be permitted. 1. Primers: provide premium grade primers recommended by paint manufacturer for Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 substrates indicated and for finish systems specified. 2. Undercoats and barrier coats: provide undercoat paints produced by same manufacturer as finish coats; use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 3. Finish coat coordination: provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints, undercoats, and barrier coats used. 4. Volatile organic compounds: provide materials with minimal volatile organic compounds (voc); comply with applicable regulations. H. Colors and finishes: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit service indicated; no lead content permitted. I. Scheduling painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation. 1. Allow time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure. J. Preparation: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as specified for substrate condition. 1. Examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied. Start of painting work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. 2. Remove hardware, accessories, and items in place and not to be painted, or provide protection prior to surface preparation and painting; after painting reinstall removed items. K. Prime coats: Apply to items not previously primed; recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat. L. Application: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until paint is a uniform finish, color and appearance. 2. Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces. 3. Provide extra attention to assure dry film thickness at comers and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces 4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and fumiture same as similar exposed surfaces; paint surfaces behind permanently - fixed equipment and fumiture with prime coat only. Finishes 014 — DIV09 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non- specular black paint. 6. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel and each vamish coat M. Minimum coating thickness: Apply materials at not Tess than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer. N. Finish coats: Provide even texture; leave no laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. O. Paint systems: provide minimum two coat plus primer systems. 1. Material and sheen as indicated in finish schedule. 2. Primer system at gypsum board and other seams receiving joint or finish compound and indicated to have a graphic stencil applied, to be: Rust-Oleum Zinsser GARDZ Problem Surface Sealer 02301. Prime surface before applying distressed finish (P.2 below) P. PINK wainscoting, trims, walls, & storefront. 1. General a. Review owner supplied sample. b. GC to provide a counter sample based on these specifications to owners pm by the end of week 3 of construction for approval prior to proceeding. c. No substitutions of materials or deviation from the process will be accepted unless it is approved in writing by the owner's pm. d. It is the GC's responsibility to maintain approved sample and the original owner's control sample on site through the opening of the store. 2. Distressed finish on trims, millwork, gyp board and MDF (P-29): a. If object (trim/fixture) is provided pre - primed from vendor then skip to step c. the element does not need re -primed. b. Apply one coat of 1:1 mix of Benjamin Moore latex clear glaze #405 and Benjamin Moore aura #522 matte finish Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 tinted to match 1145 creamy custard. Brush in direction of wood grain to resemble wood stain. Brush in the long direction of trims, and vertically for all gyp bd and panel faces. Allow to dry two hours. c. Apply two coats of 2:1 mix of Benjamin Moore latex dear glaze #405 and aura #526 satin finish (for exterior applications use aura waterbome exterior #631 satin finish) tinted to match "not quite white" (formula below). Brush in direction of wood grain. Brush in long direction of trims, and vertically for all gyp bd and panel faces. Allow to dry two hours. Should match samples provided by owner. If it does not match provided sample consult owners pm. (1) Benjamin Moore formula: not quite white; 526-1 x (quart) w1 28.1250, y2 1, s2 3.25, 01 .1875, y3.50 d. Sand edges only using 80 grit paper only to expose 30%-40% of the primer beneath. Sand edges of wood trims and millwork, not gyp bd. note: sanding to be done with limited brands pm on site. Q. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not; correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to LSD&C project manager. 1. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly - painted finishes. 2. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. R. Clean-up: During progress of work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags from site at end of each work day. 1. Clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces immediately by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces. S. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged surfaces or defaced painted surfaces. END OF DIVISION 09 Finishes 015 — DIVO9 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: 010500230 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. General: Provide floor mounted metal toilet compartments and wall mounted urinal screens with accessories as required for complete finished installation; coordinate with toilet accessories. B. Codes and regulations: Comply with state and federal requirements for ensuring access for persons with disabilities. C. Submittals: See Section 013000 D. Manufacturers: Sanymetal, Global, or Flush Metal. E. Type: Floor mounted toilet partitions and wall mounted urinal screens. 1. Finish: Standard baked enamel finish color as selected by architect from manufacturer's full line of colors. F. Pilaster shoes: 3" high; ASTM a666, type 302/304, no. 4 polished; stainless steel. G. Attachments, screws and bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type; heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets. H. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard chrome plated or similar finish. 1. Non-ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door positioning. 2. Slide latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper. 3. Coat hook/bumper cast alloy chrome plated combination unit. 4. Wall bumper cast alloy wall mounted rubber bumper for outswinging doors. 5. Pulls: comply with requirements for accessibility for persons with disabilities. I. Internal reinforcement: Provide internal reinforcement in areas of attached hardware and fittings; mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. J. Preparation: Examine site conditions to which work is to be applied; take site dimensions affecting this work. 1. Ensure correct spacing and size of plumbing fixtures; take special note of fixtures in compartments indicated to be designed for persons with disabilities to assure clearances complying with access regulations. K. Installation: Install units in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, secure, plumb, level, and square; leave 1/2" space between wall, panels and end pilasters. 1. Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched, except adjust hinges to return doors to dosed position at stalls designed for use by persons with disabilities. 2. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with two panel brackets. L. Cleaning: Field touch-up of scratches and defaced finishes will not be permitted; replace damaged, scratched and marred defective materials with new, undamaged materials; remove protective maskings; dean surfaces free of oil and imperfections SECTION 102613 - CORNER GUARDS A. General: Install stainless steel & clear comer guards with attachment devices and accessories as required for complete finished installation. B. Manufacturers: 1. Stainless steel guard: see sheet a13.1. 2. Clear comer guard: Outwater Plastic Industries Inc. #cg-17-8 (1.800.631.8375) C. Stainless steel units with satin finish, 1-1/2" x 1- 1/2" x 48" high comer guards; minimum 18 gage. Paint grip finish at sales floor. D. Installation: Comply with manufacturer recommendations. SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide toilet accessories as required for complete finished installation. B. Codes and regulations: Comply with stateand federal requirements for ensuring access for persons with disabilities. C. Manufacturers: As indicated on drawing A13.1 D. Accessories as indicated on drawing A13.1; provide grab bars with concealed mounting, sizes and shapes as indicated and as required by applicable codes and regulations. E. Materials: Stainless steel, ASTM a666, commercial grade, type 302/304, number 4 satin finish, satin chrome acceptable where stainless steel is not available for accessory item scheduled; gages as standard with manufacturer of specified items 1. Fasteners, screws, and bolts: Hot dip galvanized; as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2. Concealed surfaces: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and baked enamel finish. F. Equipment: As indicated on drawing a13.1 1. Grab bars: Stainless steel type 304 to meet requirements of ASTM #f446-85. G. Fabrication: Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components; form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. 1. Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled; hang doors and access panels with continuous piano hinges; provide concealed anchorage where possible. Specialties 01 — DIV10 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: 010500230 2. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation. 3. Form surfaces flat without distortion; maintain flat surfaces without scratches and without dents; finish exposed edges eased, free of sharp edges where potential exists for physical contact. 4. Hot dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. 5. Shop assemble components; package complete with anchors and fittings. H. Installation: Comply with manufacturer recommendations and applicable codes and regulations. SECTION 105100 - LOCKERS A. General: Install owner fumished metal lockers; provide accessories as required for complete finished installation B. Installation: Install lockers in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, secure, plumb, level, square, and in line. 1. Bolt adjoining locker units together and attach to the wall w/ 1/4" x 1" tek screws (top and bott.) at 24" o.c. to provide rigid installation. 2. Install metal bases, end panels, and filler panels to close off openings and as required for complete installation. SECTION 105626 - MOBILE / FIXED STORAGE SHELVING A. General: Install owner fumished movable and fixed compact storage system; provide accessories as required for complete finished installation. B. Examination: Examine substrates and conditions under which compacted storage system is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Manufacturer: Pipp Mobile Storage Systems, Inc. 2966 Wilson Drive NW, Walker, MI (1.800.234.pipp) D. Install units and accessories at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, level, plumb, secure and at proper height. E. Cleaning: Clean units and repair or replace damaged units as directed by LSD&C project manager. Touch-up marred finishes or replace component parts as necessary to eliminate evidence of damage or deterioration. F. Protection: Provide protection for installed system to ensure perfect operating condition without damage at completion of project. SECTION 107313 - AWNINGS Issued: 05/18/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 A. General: Provide awnings and frames with accessories as required for complete finished installation. B. Design requirements: Fabricate and install frame structure capable of withstanding minimum 20 psf wind Toad acting inward or outward upon fabric surface with frame members deflecting not greater than 1/180. C. Submittals: Fumish shop drawings, manufacturer's literature, and samples of fabric and of frame finish. D. Fabric: Provide Glen Raven Mills/Sunbrella (1.336.227.6211) "Firesist" 9.15 oz./yd2 pigmented modacrylic fiber, mildew resistant, fire - retardant treated. 1. Graphics: Provide silkscreened graphics as indicated on drawings. 2. Fabricate fabric cover to fit tightly to framing. Minimize number of seams on face of awnings; seams shall be symmetrically located relative to face of awnings. Provide lock -type seams. Hand -stitch top and side seams as required. E. Frame structure: G.C. to coordinate with awning manufacturer for frames to be built by the manufacturer or fabricated and delivered for field installation. Frame may be joined by intemal sleeving and extemal fastening, provided fastener does not telegraph through fabric. F. Accessories: Provide as required for complete secure awning installation. G. Installation: Comply with manufacturer recommendations and instructions. 1. Install frame structure plumb, level, and securely anchored to construction. 2. Install fabric cover over frame structure, and securely fasten to structure. Adjust fabric cover to ensure straightness of seam and tightness around frame; wrinkles and sag shall not be acceptable. H. Cleaning: 1. Brush off loose dirt and hose down. 2. Prepare a cleaning mixture of water and mild natural soap (no detergents) and use a soft bristle brush to dean. 3. Allow soap to soak in and rinse thoroughly. 4. Air-dry 5. If a more thorough cleaning is required use a diluted chlorine bleach/soap mixture for spot cleaning of mildew, roof run-off and other similar stains. 6. 303 high tech fabric guard should be applied after each thorough cleaning to maintain fabrics water repellency. END OF DIVISION 10 Specialties 02 — DIV10 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Store #: 010500230 Version: 142Fa.01 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) END OF DIVISION 11 Equipment 01 — DIV11 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/18/2014 Store #: 010500230 Version: 142Fa.01 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS SECTION 124813 - WALK OFF MATS AND FRAMES A. General: Provide entry carpet type floor walk off mats with accessories and subassemblies as required for complete finished installation. G.C. to provide transition strips for flush mounting of mat with adjacent floor finish. B. Codes and regulations: Comply with state and federal requirements for ensuring access for persons with disabilities. C. Manufacturers: The Matworks Company Llc, 11900 Old Baltimore Pike, Beltsville, MD 20705, (301-837-1272); or Grand Entrance (888-424- 6287). 1. VS entry: Matworks - refer to finish schedule. 2. PINK entry: Grand Entrance - refer to finish schedule. 3. Exterior accessible service doors: Matworks - refer to finish schedule D. Installation: Comply with all applicable codes and standards. GC. install per manufacturer's instructions, induding installation of all slab anchors. Failure to follow manufacturer's instructions will result in re -installation at GC expense for parts and labor. 1. For Matworks mats, substrate to be painted; once dry, clean surface prior to installing grid. END OF DIVISION 12 Fumishings 01 — DIV12 • • • • VICTORIA'S SECRET #230 - SOUTHCENTER MALL 303 SOUTHCENTER MALL SPACE #100 SEATTLE, CA 98188 MEP Specifications ISSUED: 05/16/2014 REVISIONS: Required By: A A A A n n n A A CONSOLIDATED 1 IN PII , ewe vow, vow Bc Sues 2e68 Green Grow. CA. 92846 FMu1e: 71441009167 FN[, 714E/94.7004 CONSOLIDATED MEP ENGINEERING, INC. 12062 VALLEY VIEW SUITE NO. 225B GARDEN GROVE, CA 92845 (714) 893-6157 Date LHftec ore r-, f, i LIMITED STORE PLANNING, INC. d/b/a STORE DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION PROHIBITION ON REUSE THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED FOR USE ON A SPECIFIC SITE CONTEMPORANEOUSLY WITH THEIR ISSUE DATE. THEY ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON A DIFFERENT PROJECT SITE OR AT A LATER TIME. REUSE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. OR ANY REPRODUCTION THEREOF, ON ANOTHER PROJECT IS PROHIBITED AND CONTRARY TO LAW UNLESS EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY LIMITED STORE PLANNING, INC., DMA UNITED STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION CLSDC). THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF LSDC AND SHALL NOT BE DISPLAYED IN ANY MANNER OR USED ON ANY OTHER PROJECT EXCEPT BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LSDC. NO REPRODUCTION OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE LSDC. ALL ORIGINALS OR REPRODUCTIONS OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MUST BE RETURNED TO LSDC UPON COMPLETION OF THEIR INTENDED USE, UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED BY THE LSDC. COPYRIGHT NOTICE: THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE COPYRIGHTED AND SUBJECT TO COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AS AN 'ARCHITECTURAL WORK' UNDER SEC. 102 OF THE COPYRIGHT ACT, 17 U.S.C. AS AMENDED DECEMBER 1990; KNOWN AS THE ARCHITECTURAL WORKS COPYRIGHT PROTECTION ACT OF 1990. THE PROTECTION INCLUDES, WITHOUT LIMITATION. THE OVERALL FORM. ARRANGEMENT AND COMPOSITION OF SPACES, AND ELEMENTS OF THE OESIGN. UNDER SUCH PROTECTION, UNAUTHORIZED USE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY RESULT IN CESSATION OF CONSTRUCTION, BUILDING SEIZURE. ANDIOR MONETARY LIABILITY. LSD&C Project #: 00060781 A/E Project #: 14-032 Version: 142Fa.01 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 TABLE OF CONTENTS AAAAAA DIVISION 21: FIRE PROTECTION 210000 FIRE PROTECTION DIVISION 22: PLUMBING 220000 PLUMBING DIVISION 23: HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230700 HVAC INSULATION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 232100 HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL 260000 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260126 MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260523 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 262213 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 262416 PANELBOARDS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING Table of Contents 02 — TABLE OF CONTENTS VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: #230 DIVISION 21: FIRE PROTECTION SECTION 210000: FIRE PROTECTION A. Scope of work 1. Provide a complete and operable fire protection system as it applies to the demised premise. 2. Where applicable, the contractor shall contract this work with a landlord approved fire protection contractor, all materials and equipment under this section shall be new and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. For fire protection system installation. 3. The fire protection system shall be as follows: a. New wet sprinkler fire protection system for all areas of the retail space, portions that are unheated or exposed to freezing temperatures shall be provided with an automatic dry pipe system complying with NFPA/NFPAC 13. b. Coverage shall be in accordance with existing conditions, NFPA/NFPAC 13, local codes, landlord's criteria, mall insurance and LSD&C's standards and shall Include: (1) All pipe taps, risers, laterals, branches, valves, hangers, alarms, sprinkler heads and all components required. (2) Provide professionally designed and sealed drawings, hydraulic calculations, submittals and approvals as needed including any seals, permits, fees, and charges. c. Fire extinguishers shall be provided. Refer to installation section of this specification. 4. Examine architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical documents to properly sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of the fire protection system with other contractors to avoid interferences and confrontations. 5. Contractor shall use approved industry fire sprinkler standards for reusing existing fire sprinkler branches and submit calculations to the LSD&C's project manager upon request or rework system to the LSD&C project manager's satisfaction. 6. Relocation of existing mains, laterals, branches and risers to facilitate store design criteria shall be included as part of this work. B. Shop drawings and design 1. In accordance with the prevailing standards, but no less than that required by NFPA/ NFPAC 13, this fire protection contractor shall prepare complete calculations and shop drawings. Six (6) copies shall be submitted to the general contractor and additional sets as required to the proper Fire Protection code authorities for approval (no work shall begin until all approvals have been received). 2. Copy of the letter of approval from the landlord's insurance rating bureau shall be forwarded to the landlord's agent and to the LSD&C project manager. a. Per Simon Mall Requirements: A minimum of five sets of shop drawings along with hydraulic calculations (if applicable) shall be submitted to Global Risk Consultants for approval. Hydraulic calculations shall be submitted regardless of the scope of work involved. b. Per Simon Mall Requirements: Five sets of material brochures shall also be submitted to GRC for review. Brochures shall be limited to new sprinkler heads, flexible drops and valves. Plans shall indicate the type of piping being utilized with the gauge indicated. 3. Listed below are minimum requirements for sprinkler system design and installation. System shall be hydraulically designed: a. Ordinary hazard, group 2: provide a 0.20 gpm/sf per 1,500 square feet density with 165°f rated 1/2" orifice sprinkler heads or follow NFPA/NFPAC density/area curve for density coverage. Provide a maximum coverage of 130 square feet per head. (1) Per Simon Mall Requirements: Minimum spacing shall be 70 square feet per head and spacing should not exceed 100 SF for densities over 0.25 GPM/SF. (2) Per Simon Mall Requirements: FM Global required density will be 0.15 GPM/SF over the most hydraulically remote 2500 SF using'/° orifice, 165 degree rated heads. Head spacing should not exceed 130SF. Optimum sprinkler operating area should be 300SF unless specific approval is given otherwise for special occupancies. The most remote area should have the dimensions parallel to the branch line of at least 1.4 times the square - foot of the area. The density design should conform to the most stringent FM Global or NFPA/NFPAC 13, ordinary hazard group two occupancy for retail/common/office and mechanical equipment areas. b. Maximum head spacing: 15 ft. c. Sprinklers shall be tested for a minimum of 2 hours at 200 psi. 01 — DIV21 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 d. Design calculations of inside pipe shall use c=100 for dry and c=10 for wet systems. C. Sprinkler heads 1. All sprinkler heads shall be new (existing heads in existing LSD&C stores are not to be replaced unless noted otherwise), U.L. and F.M. listed and approved automatic spray type as manufactured by automatic sprinkler, Grinnell, reliable, or Viking. 2. All sprinkler heads shall be rated as follows or as required by local codes: a. Storage areas or mezzanines: 200°f- 225°f. b. Sales area: 150°f-170°f or 200°f-225°f as noted on plans. 3. All sprinkler heads shall be as follows: a. Manufacturer (1) Sales area: base bid shall include heads manufactured by reliable with altemate bids based on Viking Micromatic model M or Grinnell model F972 and shall be approved by the LSD&C project manager prior to ordering and installation. (2) Non -sales area: rough brass finish as manufactured by Automatic Sprinkler, Star, Reliable, Grinnell or Viking Sprinkler Company only. b. Head type (1) Sales area: gypsum board=concealed; lay -in ceiling=recessed (2) Non -sales area: gypsum board or lay -in ceiling=recessed; open to structure=upright; heads mounted under 8 feet above finished floor shall be concealed or be provided with wire guards. 4. All sales area sprinkler heads Including trim and cover shall have factory applied finish. Refer to fire sprinkler head plan for finish requirements. 5. All sprinkler heads on the mall side of tenant's storefront enclosure, if any, shall match landlord's type. D. Piping, fittings, & valves 1. Schedule 40 black steel: ASTM a-53 welded and seamless, ANSI b-36-10-70 for wrought steel pipe. 2. Cast iron or malleable iron screwed fittings for pipes 2 Inches and smaller, screwed or cast iron flanged joints for pipes larger than 2 Inches. Fitting shall be approved for 175 psi working pressure. 3. Galvanized or black malleable iron with brass seat screwed unions for pipes 2 Inches and smaller. 4. Victaulic type couplings are acceptable where approved by local code and the landlord. Fire Protection Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 5. Per Simon Mall Requirements: Approved FM lightwall piping with roll groves may be used is sizes larger than 2 inches, except where pipe is subject to physical damage. 6. Per Simon Mall Requirements: All hangers shall conform to FM Global guidelines, structural steel headers shall be installed for supporting cross main hangers where the main is not directly below a structural member. 7. Per Simon Mall Requirements: Cast iron wall plates shall be provided on exposed piping where pipe passes through walls, partitions, ceilings, etc., secured by setscrews. 8. Per Simon Mall Requirements: Valves shall be FM Global approved and rated 175 PSI minimum. E. Installation 1. A fire protection system tap is normally fumished by the landlord, verify in field prior to bid. a. Whenever an existing sprinkler system is being renovated, the integrity and reliability of the existing system shall be maintained. b. Original sprinkler shop drawings shall be acquired through the mall manager/project manager; however, the sprinkler contractor shall verify the existing sprinkler system in the field and shall coordinate with and show discrepancies between the original shop drawings and field conditions in the renovated shop drawings. 2. Installation shall include testing the building system prior to connecting to mall sprinkler system. Testing shall be approved by the fire department and landlord representatives. Final connection to landlord's sprinkler main will not be made until the entire system within the demise premises is tested and ready for service. 3. Sprinkler head spacing shall comply with ordinary hazard, group 2. 4. System shall comply with the most stringent of these specifications, the landlord's design criteria or local codes with pipe sizing being based on NFPA/NFPAC ordinary hazard, group 2 and comply with NFPA/NFPAC 13 latest edition. 5. All sprinkler lines shall be concealed and mounted as high as is practical, avoiding interference with lights, ducts, pipes, storage deck, etc. 6. Fire protection contractor shall prepare coordinated shop drawings indicating the locations of all sprinkler heads, sprinkler lines, lights, diffusers, grilles and registers prior to installation. 7. Relocate all mains and branches interfering with ceiling heights, equipment and major components, Inclusive of adjacent tenants 02 — DIV21 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Store #: #230 Version: 142Fa.01 and mall common areas, remove all unused piping. 8. Fastening and/or suspension devices must be attached to the building structure only. Support shall be from the top of any bar joist or as directed by the landlord or the building structural engineer. 9. Fumish and install a valved test connection in an accessible location for the sprinkler system as required or requested by the mall, local inspector, or insurance carrier - coordinate location with the LSD&C project manager and local fire protection official to rough -in. 10. When completed, the entire fire protection piping system shall be hydrostatically tested as required by the rules and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction. System shall show no signs of leakage or other defects. This contractor shall be responsible for damage to the work of the other contractors or to the building, or to its contents, people, etc., expense. Completely flush the system until discharge shows no discoloration. 11. Properly completed and signed "sprinkler contractor's material and test certificates Fire Protection shall be fumished to the landlord, authorities having jurisdiction, tenant's architect, insurance representative, project office and the LSD&C project manager. 12. Provide valved drain with hose thread at all low points or traps in sprinkler piping. Identify drain valves if above hard ceilings with a suitable ceiling marker and provide architect approved method for access as required. 13. Coordinate sprinkler work with fire/alarm contractor where there are flow and tamper switches and alarm requirements. 14. Sprinkler system shall be interfaced with building fire/life safety and smoke exhaust system if required. Refer to landlord tenant criteria and requirements. 15. Fumish and install 10Ib. Type "ABC" fire extinguishers with cabinets if required, and at least a "4A-80B:C" rated extinguisher. Locations are to be established in the field by the LSD&C project manager and the local fire protection official maximum travel distance between extinguishers shall be 75 feet or less as required by local codes. 03 — DIV21 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 DIVISION 22: PLUMBING SECTION 220000: PLUMBING A. Scope of work 1. This contractor shall fumish all labor, materials, equipment, services, tools, transportation and facilities necessary for, reasonably implied and Incidental to, the fumishing, installation, completion and testing of all work for the plumbing systems as shown on the drawings, called for in the specifications, and as required by job conditions, to Include, but not be limited to the following: a. Complete sanitary piping systems of waste, drains, and vents. b. Complete cold and hot water piping systems, appurtenances and insulation. c. Fixtures and equipment as scheduled. d. Complete natural gas or propane piping systems (as applicable, refer to plans). e. Condensate piping systems (as applicable, refer to plans). Tests and adjustments. Submit a complete set of reproducible as-builts. 2. Before starting work, this contractor shall examine the architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical plans and specifications to sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of the plumbing system, materials, and equipment with other contractors to avoid interferences and confrontations. 3. GC to provide written report to LSD&C pm on condition of existing sewer tie-in regarding slope and flow. a. Scope with camera prior to connection. b. Do not connect without LSD&C pm authorization if specs not met. 4. Relocation of existing water, gas, waste, vent, or drainage lines to facilitate store design criteria must be included in bid proposal. B. Equipment and installation 1. Refer to plans for schedules of equipment and fixtures. American standard and crane may be considered with approval from LSD&C project manager. 2. Sanitary piping a. Provide all sanitary waste, sewers, and vents within the project space with connection to the existing drainage systems on -site. Sanitary waste and vent piping above floor shall be hubless cast-iron pipe, fittings and connections. Sanitary waste and vent piping below grade shall be schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe with solvent weld fittings, or service -weight cast-iron with neoprene gasket joint system. No PVC plastic f. 9. Plumbing Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 piping allowed within ceiling voids used for non -ducted retum air plenum or in walls, except in Canada where XFR- PVC may be used if permitted by the authority having jurisdiction. All drainage piping shall be uniformly pitched, 1/4" per foot for pipe sizes 3" and smaller, 1/8" per foot for pipe sizes 4" and larger, unless otherwise required by existing conditions, or indicated on the drawings. b. Insulate all horizontal runs of piping located in ceiling spaces, when applicable. Insulation to be as specified for water piping. c. Condensate piping shall be type 'L' drawn copper tube with 95-5 tin - antimony soldered joints and wrought copper fittings with dielectric separation between dissimilar metals. 3. Potable water piping shall be as follows: a. Below grade: type 'K', annealed type tempered copper tube for pipe sizes 2 Inches and smaller, braze all joints. b. All other: type 'L' drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and 95-5 tin - antimony solder. 4. Piping of dissimilar metals must be dielectrically separated. 5. Generally, sanitary and potable water taps will be provided by the landlord. Field verify exact connection points prior to submitting bid. Notify the LSD&C project manager, if conditions are not as shown on the plans or as stated in the specifications. Contractor must verify the operability of entire system prior to tie-in as follows: a. Scope sanitary to lease line, snake as required and report any blockages. b. Test water pressure to insure minimum psi matches most demanded by equipment supplied. 6. Insulate all hot water, cold water and condensate piping with 1" thick (k=0.23 @ 751) pipe insulation with an all service jacket to meet local codes and UUULC flame spread and smoke developed ratings. 7. Insulate the trap, sanitary and supply pipes under lavatory with 1/2" Armstrong "Armaflex" piping insulation or Truebro model 102w "Handi Lav guard" insulation kit. 8. Install all necessary pipe hangers, saddles, and carriers to properly support all piping and fixtures. Hangers shall suit type of piping provided and be spaced at a maximum span of 5 feet. Provide sway and seismic bracing where required by codes. 9. Sterilize water system in accordance with local codes. 10. Cleanouts and floor drains shall be installed per local codes. Wall covers are to be stainless steel and floor covers are to be brass, unless otherwise specified. Provide 01 — DIV22 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 floor covers with inset area for carpeted locations. All cleanout locations shall be approved by the LSD&C project manager. 11. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated, size as required, and placed at all pipe penetrations at walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas. 12. Leakage tests shall be per local codes minimum as follows: a. Test water piping at 100 psig for six hours. b. Test drain, waste, vent piping by a 10' water column for two hours. 13. Flashing shall be sealed watertight and performed in accordance to the landlord's criteria. Use a landlord approved roofing contractor, where applicable. 14. Provide water meter and remote reader per landlord's criteria or local utilities requirements, if applicable. Refer to plans to determine if water meter is required. C. Gas piping 1. Fumish and install a complete gas piping system, if applicable. Refer to plans to determine if a gas system is required. 2. Gas lines shall be black steel, schedule 40, ASTM a-53, with malleable threaded fittings Plumbing Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 for 2" and smaller, and with welded joints for 2-1/2" and larger. 3. Fumish and install a gas cock, drip leg and union connection to each piece of equipment. 4. Support piping as required by code or required by landlord criteria, whichever is more stringent. 5. Gas piping exposed on roof must be painted with rust -inhibiting paint. 6. Gas piping installed in retum air plenums shall be sleeved and vented, or welded in accordance with the local gas company, local code, and applicable NFPA/NFPAC 54 codes. 7. Testing and purging of gas piping shall be done per the requirements of the local gas company, local codes, and applicable NFPA/NFPAC 54 codes, up to final connection point at the appliance. 8. Contact and coordinate gas service, meter and regulator requirements with the local gas company and the mall's operations manager prior to bid. Include installation cost of gas meter and regulator in bid. 02 — DIV22 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 DIVISION 23: MECHANICAL SECTION 230000: BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Note 1. The abbreviation LSD&C wherever it appears in these mechanical drawings and/or specifications shall refer to "Limited Store Design and Construction". Any reference to tenant's project manager or fumished by any of the above refers to LSD&C. 2. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and all other specification sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 15. 3. The contractor for this division of work is required to read the specifications and review drawings for all divisions of work and is responsible for the coordination of this work and the work of his subcontractors with all divisions of work. It is this contractor's responsibility to provide his subcontractors with a complete set of bid documents. 4. This contractor is responsible for scheduling the completion and inspection of this work to comply with the LSD&C schedule and the project completion date. 5. This contractor shall visit the site prior to submittal of bid to determine conditions affecting the work. Any items which are not covered in the bid documents or any proposed substitutions shall be listed separately and qualified in the contractors bid. Submittal of bid shall serve as evidence of knowledge of existing conditions and any modifications which are required to meet the intent of the drawings and specifications. Failure to visit the site does not relieve the contractor of responsibility in performance of his work. 6. Refer to responsibility schedule on sheet M04.01 of this set for information in regard to responsibility of work or items which may affect the bid. B. General requirements 1. This contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, services, tools, transportation, Incidentals and details necessary to provide a complete mechanical system as shown on the drawings, called for in the specifications, and as required by job conditions. All work not specifically noted as being by the landlord or LSD&C shall be provided by this contractor. Closely coordinate the entire installation with the landlord and the LSD&C project manager, as required. Mechanical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 2. The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other and any material or labor called for in one shall be furnished and installed even though not specifically mentioned in both. Any material or labor which is neither shown on the drawings nor called for in the specifications, but which is obviously necessary to complete the work, and which is usually included in work of similar character, shall be fumished and installed as part of contract. 3. Where the drawings or specifications call for items which exceed codes or the landlord's tenant criteria, the contractor is responsible for fumishing and installing the system with the more stringent requirements as designed and described on these drawings, unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. All work in this section shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operating, servicing, maintaining, and repairing. This contractor is responsible for providing sufficient service access to all equipment. 5. All work shall be performed in a neat professional manner using good construction practices. 6. Unless specifically noted otherwise, materials, products, and equipment, including all components thereof, shall be new, Underwriter's Laboratories/Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada listed and labeled and sized in conformity with requirements of state/province and local codes, whichever is more stringent. 7. This contractor shall do all cutting, chasing and channeling required for any work under this division. Cutting shall have prior approval by LSD&C project manager and the landlord. All patching shall be by G.C. and shall match the surrounding surfaces. 8. The mechanical contractor shall make all final mechanical connections as required for a complete and operating system. a. The mechanical contractor shall notify the general contractor to contact LSD&C's designated company (EMS) for start-up. (Refer to sheet M01.01). C. Codes 1. All work shall conform to the landlords' criteria, the state's/province's, county's, city's and local codes and ordinances, safety and health codes, NFPA/NFPAC codes, energy codes and all other applicable codes and requirements. This contractor shall inquire into and comply with all applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations. This contractor shall include any changes required by codes in the bid and if these changes are not included in the bid, they must be qualified as a separate line item in the bid. After contract is awarded, change orders for increased 01 — DIV23 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 costs due to code issues will not be accepted by LSD&C. D. Licenses, permits, inspections & fees 1. This contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits, inspections, and fees required or related to his work. 2. Furnish to the LSD&C's project manager all certificates of inspection and final inspection approval at completion of project. E. Trade names, manufacturers and shop drawings 1. Where trade names and manufacturers are used on the drawings or in the specifications, the exact equipment shall be used as a minimum for the base bid. Manufacturers considered as an equal or better in all aspects to that specified will be subject to approval in writing by LSD&C's project manager through shop drawing submittal process for acceptance prior to installation. The use of any unauthorized equipment shall be replaced at the contractor's expense. 2. General contractor shall submit only substitution requests to LSD&C project manager for approval. Submissions shall be made early enough in project to allow four (4) working days for LSD&C project manager's review without causing delays or conflicts to the job's progress. Submittals shall bear the stamp and/or the signature of the general contractor and the subcontractor showing that he has reviewed and confirmed that the submittals are in conformance with the contract drawings and specifications or indicate where exceptions have been taken. F. Guarantee 1. This contractor shall guarantee all materials and work provided under his contract and shall make good, repair or replace at his own expense, any defective work, material, or equipment which may be discovered within a period of 12 months from the date of acceptance (in writing) of the installation by LSD&C's project manager. Extended warranties are as specified with individual equipment. 2. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee and provide a 12 month guarantee to LSD&C from the date of acceptance. This contractor shall warranty the installation of this equipment and will be responsible for any damage and/or malfunction caused by the installation. This contractor shall not bear additional warranties beyond a complete working system. G. Record drawings 1. This contractor shall maintain one set of drawings on the job site updated weekly to record all deviations from contract drawings, such as: a. Location of concealed piping valves and ducts. Mechanical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 b. Revisions, addendum, and change orders. c. Significant deviations made necessary by field conditions, approved equipment substitutions, and contractor's coordination with other trades. 2. At completion of the project and before final approval, this contractor shall make any final corrections to drawings and certify the accuracy of each print by signature thereon. Failure to keep these records will allow LSD&C to direct the general contractor to provide these records at his expense prior to final payment. H. Discrepancies in documents 1. Drawings (plans, specifications, and details) are diagrammatic and indicate the general location and intent of the mechanical systems. Where drawings, existing site conditions, specifications or other trades conflict or are unclear, advise the general contractor in writing, prior to submittal of bid. The general contractor is responsible to advise LSD&C's project manager, in writing, of variations to contract documents prior to submission of bid. Otherwise, LSD&C project manager's interpretation of contract documents or conditions shall be final with no additional compensation permitted. I. Phasing requirements 1. This contractor is to include in his bid all necessary service required to keep the operating phase of the store's HVAC, plumbing and sprinkler service in operation. Contractor must schedule in writing with LSD&C's project manager and the landlord one week prior to any shut down of the HVAC, plumbing or fire protection systems. J. Demolition 1. This contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the demolition of existing work and the demolition provided by the general contractor. Coordinate with the general contractor any existing equipment required to be left intact. 2. This contractor shall include, and will be held responsible for, the removal of all existing HVAC units, hydronic piping, refrigerant recapture, exhaust fans, etc. And associated roof curbs not to be reused on this project, unless specifically noted otherwise. Contractor must verify with the landlord all presumed abandoned equipment, pipes, and ductwork prior to removal. Roof curbs shall be removed and the roof patched. All extraneous items in the space or on the roof not applicable to the new work must be removed and roof/wall/floor patched/repaired to match existing structure. Existing abandoned pipes, ducts, or equipment in the floor, embedded in concrete or otherwise inaccessible are to be cut off and sealed 02 — DIV23 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: #230 below or within floor or wall level when they are not to be reused in this project. If required by landlord or codes, abandoned piping and/or ductwork must be removed to point of origin. Confirm the extent of demolition prior to bid and include in bid proposal. K. Sleeves 1. This contractor shall provide sleeves to protect equipment or facilities in the installation. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, wall or partition and shall be cut flush with each surface except sleeves that penetrate the floor, which shall extend 2" above the floor. Contractor must coordinate through the landlord any core drilling or cutting of openings in masonry floors or walls. 2. All sleeves and openings through fire rated walls and/or floors shall be fire sealed with calcium silicate, silicone "RTV" foam, "3M" fire rated sealants or equal, so as to retain their fire rating. 3. Sleeves in bearing and masonry walls, floors, and partitions shall be standard weight steel pipe finished with smooth edges. For other than masonry partitions, through suspended ceilings, or for concealed vertical piping, sleeves shall be no. 22 U.S.G. galvanized steel minimum. L. Scope of work 1. This contractor shall fumish all labor, materials, equipment, services, tools, transportation and facilities necessary for, reasonably implied and incidental to, the fumishing, installation, completion and testing of all the work for the HVAC systems as shown on the drawings, called for in the specifications, and as required by job conditions, to include, but not be limited to the following: a. HVAC units, all related equipment and accessories (unless noted otherwise). b. Ductwork, fittings, dampers, and insulation. c. Hydronic piping. (as applicable, refer to plans). d. Refrigerant piping (as applicable, refer to plans). e. Curbs, roofing, and steel framing for support (as applicable, refer to plans). f. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. g. Keeping a record set and prepare as - built drawings. 2. Before starting work, this contractor shall visit the job site and examine the architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical plans and specifications to sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of the HVAC system, materials, and equipment with other Mechanical contractors to avoid interferences and confrontations. 3. Relocation of existing duct mains or branches to meet store design criteria must be included in bid proposal. M. HVAC equipment 1. Primary heating and air conditioning units are to be fumished by LSD&C as scheduled unless noted otherwise. Refer to plans for requirements. All equipment shall include a five (5) year compressor and ten (10) year heat exchanger warranty. 2. All equipment shall be complete in every respect with all devices and accessories provided to meet the design intent and operation of the systems shown on the drawings and specified herein. 3. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. N. Equipment fumished by limited store design and construction 1. The following equipment is fumished by LSD&C and installed by this contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. Refer to responsibility schedule and plans for applicability. a. HVAC units. b. Toilet exhaust fans. c. Diffusers, grilles and registers. d. Temperature controls. 2. All ductwork, roof openings and caps necessary to provide a complete toilet exhaust system shall be fumished and installed by this contractor. O. Curbs for support 1. This contractor shall fumish and install curb adaptors on existing curbs where allowed by landlord. Curb adaptors must be manufactured by Thybar, Micrometi, or LSD&C approved equal. 2. Where existing curbs are not available or where curb adaptors are not allowed this contractor shall fumish and install all necessary curbs required to install all HVAC equipment as described on the drawings. Curbs shall be a minimum of 14" high (see M04.01 "local area requirements" item # 5), of the same manufacturer of the equipment unless noted otherwise. 3. All curbs and curb adaptors shall be installed such that top of curbs are level. All penetrations of existing structure shall be done in accordance with the landlord's guidelines at this contractor's expense. This contractor shall receive LSD&C project manager's written approval before any work takes place. This contractor is also responsible for all seismic, hurricane or other securing devices required by local or other codes. P. Labels/pipe markers 03 — DIV23 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 1. Fumish and install pipe identification markers on all pipes installed under this contract. Markers shall be a minimum of 1- 1/2" x 8" and identified in accordance with the background and letter colors issued by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Piping shall be identified as follows: chilled water retum, chilled water supply, condensate, hot water retum, hot water supply, condenser water retum, condenser water supply, refrigerant liquid, refrigerant suction, and directional arrows. All identifications must be visible at equipment. Q. Final HVAC inspections 1. Aside from normal interim inspections of work in place, LSD&C shall have an independent HVAC contractor inspect the finished HVAC installation upon completion for compliance with the plans, specifications and codes. The installing contractor will be responsible to bring all items reported by the independent HVAC contractor up to plans and specification requirements. SECTION 230500: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC A. Hangers 1. Hangers shall include all miscellaneous steel such as angle iron, bands, c-clamps with retaining clips, channels, hanger rods, etc., necessary for the installation of work. 2. Hangers shall be fastened to building steel, concrete, or masonry, but not to piping. Hanging from metal deck is not permitted. Hangers must be attached to upper chord of bar joist. Where interferences occur, and in order to support ductwork or piping, the contractor must install trapeze type hangers or supports which shall be located where they do not interfere with access to fire dampers, valves, and other equipment. Hanger types and installation methods are also subject to landlord criteria. 3. Hangers for all insulated piping shall be sized and installed for the outer diameter of insulation. Install 6" long split circle galvanized saddle between the hanger and the pipe insulation. 4. Hangers and piping of dissimilar metals shall be di -electrically separated. B. Vibration isolation devices 1. Spring vibration isolation devices shall be fumished and installed in all supports between vibrating equipment (fans, air handlers, etc.) And structure. Isolators to be sized according to load with a min. 1" deflection. Vibrating equipment hung from structure shall be isolated with rubber and spring devices. Vibrating equipment Mechanical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 supported from floor or deck shall be isolated with housed spring mount devices. 2. Examine dead load and operating load conditions when selecting devices. Adjust for proper alignment and loading. Avoid "grounding" the isolator. 3. Check hanger rod size for allowable Toads at the isolating device and at the upper and lower attachments to structures, ducts, equipment, etc. 4. Consult manufacturer for application data. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing 1. Testing, adjusting and balancing of all work shall be made by an independent contractor who is a currently licensed Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) balancing contractor. No other balance reports will be accepted. All balancing work must be complete and done in accordance with the most recent standards of their society and as a minimum shall include the information as shown in the air balance review checklist in the GC project manual. Payment of all costs for testing and balancing shall be included in the bid. However, it will be the G.C. that will contract directly with the air balancing company. 2. Final testing, adjusting and balancing report must be complete and submitted with final close-out documents to LSD&C 1 week prior to merchandising date. 3. The HVAC contractor shall be present for air balance to verify accessibility to all devices, verify all operating sequences and install new filters in all units just prior to the air balance. The complete air balance shall take place with outside air dampers in minimum position, except as noted otherwise. HVAC contractor shall also install a new set of filters one day prior to merchandising. 4. Balance landlord media quantities to within 5% of that indicated on the drawings. Any required changes in sheaves, belts or pulleys needed to achieve specified flow rates shall be performed by the HVAC contractor with no additional cost to LSD&C. 5. All control sequences shall be tested (interlocked equipment, smoke detectors, smoke evacuation, economizer, etc.) And operating status recorded in the balance report. 6. Air balancing contractor is to confirm override of minimum outside air intake upon CO2 monitoring confirmation. For CO2 monitoring contact, see contact information on sheet M01.02. 7. Three copies of the balance report shall be submitted through the general contractor to LSD&C for approval. The general contractor shall verify the completeness of the reports prior to submitting to LSD&C. Submit one 04 — DIV23 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 copy of final approved air balance report to mall general manager. 8. The balancing contractor shall perform all applicable testing and balancing functions required for the system designed on these drawings. All systems unable to be completely balanced at the time of original balance must be balanced in future at no additional expense to LSD&C the balancing contractor shall recheck any items that LSD&C deems necessary at no additional cost to LSD&C. D. Valves 1. Gate valves, 2-inch and smaller: class 150, body and union bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze with threaded or solder ends, integral seat, renewable solid bronze wedge disc, rising stem, screwed bonnet and re -packable under pressure. Ball valves are accepted as an equal substitution. 2. Gate valves, 2-1/2 inch and larger: class 125 cast iron body, renewable bronze seats and solid wedge disc, rising stem, flanged ends, and re -packable under pressure. 3. Swing check valves, 2-inch and smaller: class 150, cast bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62 with horizontal swing, Y-pattem, renewable bronze disc, and having threaded or soldered ends. 4. Swing check valve, 2-1/2 inch and larger: class 125 cast iron body and bolted cap, horizontal swing, renewable bronze disc, flanged ends and capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. 5. Combination balancing and shutoff valves: Bell & Gossett circuit setter with locking set point. A circuit setter balance wheel must be included with 0 & M manual. Taco or Griswold are considered as equal. SECTION 230700: HVAC INSULATION A. Ductwork insulation 1. Fumish and install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices. Insulation must comply with NFPA/NFPAC 90A. 2. All insulation shall have a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84-05, or as required by local codes. 3. Ductwork shall be insulated according to the energy code adopted by local AHJ. It is the contractor's responsibility to confirm code and provide adequate insulation as indicated below (within assumed parameters).This spec does not include requirements for ductwork located within a ventilated attic or outside. In such instances, refer directly to code adopted by local AHJ. Mechanical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 a. Rectangular Supply and Retum air Ducts - Plenum Retum air System: Duct sizes shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions. All rectangular ductwork (supply and retum) shall be intemally insulated to thickness listed below. Liner is to have a coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion. Apply adhesives and mechanical fasteners as recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer to prevent liner separation from the duct. All adhesives shall be low VOC type. All transverse edges to be coated with adhesive. Lined ductwork does not need to be wrapped unless required by Mall. (1) 2007 & 2010 ASHRAE 90.1, 2009 IECC, 2012 IECC, 2009, 2010 Oregon Energy Code, and 2012 Washington State Energy Code: Provide 1" thick, 1.5 Ib/ft^3, minimum intemal liner (conductivity <=0.26 @ 75°F; R-4.0) b. Rectangular Supply and Retum air Ducts - Ducted Retum air System: Duct sizes shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions. All rectangular ductwork (supply and retum) shall be intemally insulated to thickness listed below. Liner is to have a coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion. Apply adhesives and mechanical fasteners as recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer to prevent liner separation from the duct. All transverse edges to be coated with adhesive. Lined ductwork does not need to be wrapped unless required by Mall. (1) 2007 & 2010 ASHRAE 90.1, Provide 1" thick, 1.5 Ib/ft^3, minimum internal liner (conductivity <=0.26 @ 75°F; R-4.0 min.) for all supply air ductwork and first 15'-0" of the retum air ductwork. (2) 2009 IECC, 2012 IECC, 2012 Washington State Energy Code and 2010 Oregon Energy Code, Provide 1.5" thick (2" also acceptable), 1.5 Ib/ft"3, minimum intemal liner (conductivity <=0.17 @ 75°F; R-6.0 min.) 4. All outdoor air (round, oval, and rectangular) and round/oval supply air ductwork shall be externally insulated as indicated: a. Plenum and Ducted Retum air Systems: All outdoor air (round, oval, and rectangular) and round/oval supply air ductwork shall be extemally insulated with a duct wrap with vapor barrier. Refer to thickness below. Vapor barrier 05 — DIV23 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 is to be maintained throughout duct system. All joints must be overlapped and tucked so that no insulation fiber is visible. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and other penetrations. (1) 2007 and 2010 ASHRAE 90.1, 2009 and 2012 International Energy Code, 2010 Oregon Energy Code: Provide a minimum of 2" thick, 1.0 Ib/ft^3 (R=7.6, R=6.1 installed) duct wrap with vapor barrier. (2) 2012 Washington State Energy Code: (a) Supply and retum air round and oval ductwork insulation: Round/oval supply and retum air ductwork shall be extemally insulated with a minimum of 2" thick duct wrap, 1.0 Ib/ft^3 (Installed R-6.1). (b) Outside air ductwork insulation for units supplying less than 2800 CFM: all outdoor air (round, oval, and rectangular) ductwork shall be externally insulated with a minimum of 2- 1/2" thick duct wrap, 0.75 Ib/ft^3 (installed R-7.1). (c) Outside air ductwork insulation for units surviving more than 2800 CFM: Provide two layers of 2.5" thick, 2.25 Ib/ft^3, extemal board insulation (conductivity 0.24 © 75°F; R- 20.8). B. Hydronic piping insulation 1. All hydronic piping for chilled water and/or hot water (not including condenser water unless specifically noted otherwise), valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated according to the energy code adopted by local AHJ. It is the contractor's responsibility to confirm code and provide adequate insulation as indicated below (within assumed parameters). Chilled water temperature is assumed to be no Tess than 40°F and hot water temperature no greater than 200°F. In the case that actual project conditions exceed these values, refer directly to the code adopted by local AHJ for requirements. a. Per ASHRAE 90.1-2007: (1) When all pipe sizes are less than 8 inches: Insulate with 1 inch thick fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulation shall have a conductivity not to exceed 0.28 btu•in/h•ft2•°F @75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C 547. Mechanical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 (2) When pipe sizes exceed 8 inches: Insulate with fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulation shall have a conductivity not to exceed 0.28 btu•in/h42-° F at 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C547. Insulate pipes sized Tess than 8 inches with 1 inch thick insulation. Insulate pipes sized 8 inches and larger with 1-1/2" thick insulation. b. Per ASHRAE 90.1-2010: (1) When all pipe sizes are less that 1- 1/2 inches: insulate with 1-1/2" inch thick fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulation shall have a conductivity not to exceed 0.26 btu•in/h•ft2•°F @75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C547. (2) When pipe sizes equal or exceed 1- 1/2 inches: insulate with fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulate pipes sized less than 1-1/2 inches with 1-1/2 inch thick insulation. Insulate pipes sized 1-1/2 inches and larger with 2" thick insulation. Insulation shall have a conductivity not to exceed 0.26 btu•in/h•ft2•°F @75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C547. c. 2009 International Energy Conservation Code: (1) Insulate with fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulation shall have a conductivity not to exceed 0.27 btu•in/h•ft2•°F © 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C547. Insulate pipes sized 1-1/2 inches and smaller with 1 inch thick insulation. Insulate pipes sized larger than 1-1/2 inches with 1-1/2 inch thick insulation. d. 2012 International Energy Conservation Code: (1) Insulate with fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulate chilled water pipes with 1 inch thick insulation having a conductivity not to exceed 0.28 btu•in/h•ft2•°F © 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C547. Insulate hot water pipes with 2 inch thick insulation having a conductivity not to exceed 0.28 btu•in/h•ft2.° F © 125°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C547. e. 2008/2010 California Energy Code: 06 — DIV23 (1) Insulate with fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulate chilled water pipes with 1 inch thick insulation with a conductivity not to exceed 0.27 btu•in/h•ft2•°F at 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C335. Insulate hot water pipes with 1-1/2" thick insulation with a conductivity not to exceed 0.29 btu•in/h•ft2•°F at 125°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C335. f. 2012 Washington State Energy Code: (1) Insulate with fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulate chilled water pipes with 1-1/2 inch thick insulation with a conductivity not to exceed 0.26 btu•in/h•ft2•°F at 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C335. Insulate hot water pipes (up to 200°F) sized less than 1.5 inches with 1-1/2" thick insulation with a conductivity not to exceed 0.29 btu•in/h•ft2•°F at 125°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C335. Insulate hot water pipes sized 1.5 inches or larger with 2" thick insulation with a conductivity not to exceed 0.29 btu•in/h•ft2•°F at 125°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C335. 2010 Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code: (1) Insulate with fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and vapor barrier. Insulation shall have a conductivity not to exceed 0.27 btu•in/h•ft2•°F @ 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C547. Insulate pipes sized 1-1/2 inches and smaller with 1 inch thick insulation. Insulate pipes sized larger than 1-1/2 inches with 1-1/2 inch thick insulation. 2. Insulation at all hangers for piping 2-1/2 Inches and larger shall be hard and non - compressible. 3. All insulation shall have a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50 to conform with the requirements of the NFPA/NFPAC. 4. Provide Zeston or equal insulation fittings for all tees, ells or specialty fittings. C. Refrigerant piping insulation 1. Insulate the refrigerant suction lines and condensate lines with 1 1/2" pipe insulation similar to Flextherm seam -seal or Insul-lock. Insulation shall be a closed cell fiber free elastomeric foam in accordance with ASTM C 534, type I - tubular, grade 1; shall have a 9• VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 Mechanical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 conductivity not to exceed 0.26 btu•in/h•ft2•°F at 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or C 518; shall have a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84; and shall have a maximum water absorption % of 0.2 by volume when tested in accordance with ASTM C 209. Do not insulate the hot gas (liquid) lines or any hot gas bypass. SECTION 230900: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC A. Work responsibility 1. LSD&C HVAC supplier will fumish necessary control devices to the field. For all devices not factory installed, it will be the mechanical contractor's responsibility to install. SECTION 232100: HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS A. Hydronic piping 1. Furnish and install a complete hydronic piping system if applicable. Refer to plans to determine if a hydronic system is required. Unless otherwise noted the working pressure for system piping and components shall be at minimum 150 psig. 2. Piping a. Hydronic piping for chilled water, condenser water and/or heating water shall be ASTM A 53, schedule 40, ERW, black steel pipe with plain ends. Install steel pipe with welded joints where pipe is 2-1/2 inch and larger. Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings. Install type "K" copper pipe for 2 inch and smaller pipe. Provide dielectric unions between dissimilar metals. All piping shall be in strict conformance with ASTM, ASA, and landlord's requirements; whichever is most stringent. Unions or flanges must be used at equipment connections where service or removal may be required. b. All piping and equipment shall be pressure tested without leakage at a minimum pressure of 125 psi. c. All hydronic piping and equipment connected to the HVAC piping system shall be cleaned and flushed. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. Fill tenant's system with domestic water and vent all piping and equipment prior to connection to the landlord's system. Contractor shall not fill tenant's system with water from the landlord's system 07 — DIV23 1 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: #230 unless specifically instructed to do so from the landlord's field representative. Any runs thru a chase or shaft will be done with fewest joints possible using the longest length of hard copper pipe available. Should a joint be required, contractor shall make all efforts to keep the joints in accessible areas. d. Prior to connection to the landlord's system, contractor shall obtain written confirmation from the landlord's field representative, that all testing, flushing, and proper filling of the tenant's system has been completed in accordance to the landlord's requirements and that the tenant's system is ready to be connected to the landlord's system. 3. Piping specialties a. Pressure/temperature test plugs (Pete's plug) -1/4 inch NPT fittings to receive either a temperature or pressure probe, 1/8 inch O.D. fitting and caps shall be brass with valve core of Nordel, rated at 400 psig, 0 to 200 degrees F. b. Strainers - "Y" pattern strainers, 125 psig, cast iron body with perforated stainless steel screen, threaded for 2 inches and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 inches and larger. Screen opening size at 0.033 inch for heating and 1/8 inch for chilled or condenser water. Provide with blowdown valve with hose end fitting. c. Flexible hose: pipe size 1/2 inch to 1-1/4 inch - provide plenum rated stainless steel braided hose with EPDM core. End connections shall be compatible with pipes to be joined. Provide dielectric unions between dissimilar metals. Pipe size 1-1/2 inch and larger- provide stainless steel braided hose over a corrugated stainless steel tube with carbon steel end fittings. End fittings shall be compatible with pipes to be joined. Provide dielectric unions between dissimilar metals. d. Dielectric unions: where joining two separate metals provide a connector assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. 4. General installation a. Install water mains without pitch. Use eccentric reducing couplings at changes in size with the top of pipes at same elevation. b. Branches to units below mains to be taken from bottom of mains at a 45 degree angle, pitch downward toward units. Branches to units above mains to be taken from top of mains at a 45 Mechanical degree angle pitched upward towards units. Pitch not less than 1" to 10 feet. c. See mechanical detail drawings for applicable details. d. Provide UUULC listed fire stopping system around all piping penetrations through rated walls. Penetrations shall meet the requirements of UL ULC details WL1001 (uninsulated wall) and WL5039 (insulated wall). SECTION 232300: REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Refrigerant piping: 1. This contractor shall fumish and install a complete refrigerant piping system between the indoor fan units and outdoor condensing units. Refer to plans to determine if a refrigerant system is required. New piping is required. Reuse of existing piping is not allowed. 2. Piping a. Refrigerant piping shall be type ACR copper tubing. Tubing shall be clean and clear of debris, and evacuated with a deep vacuum prior to refrigerant charge. The contractor shall confirm the diameter of the refrigerant piping runs in excess of 50 equivalent feet with the architect, engineer, and manufacturer for all split systems. No refrigerant piping runs exceeding 100 equivalent feet are to be installed without LSD&C PM's permission. The manufacturer shall provide all final pipe sizing and coil selections for all refrigerant piping systems. b. All fittings and joints shall be wrought copper or cast bronze (ANSI B 16.22). All copper to copper joints shall be brazed with a copper -phosphorus alloy and all other joints shall be brazed with Silfos-5 alloy. c. All elbows are to be long radius type. 3. Installation a. Refrigerant pipe sizing shall be the responsibility of the HVAC supplier. Contractor will provide a schematic proposed layout of the system including all elbows, rises, runs, etc., with dimensions. The HVAC supplier will then provide written documentation of pipe sizes and additional required system components to the field. b. Suction lines shall have adequate lift traps and/or double suction risers to meet the requirements of field conditions and equipment manufacturer's recommendations. c. Braze all joints with Silfos-5 starting at the indoor unit and working toward the outdoor unit. The seals on the outdoor 08 — DIV23 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: #230 unit shall be broken last. A nitrogen bleed shall be used during all brazing and any time the system is open. All open lines shall be capped and sealed before leaving the site during construction. Pressure test for leaks with an inert gas up to 245 psig. Redo leaking joints and retest until system is tight. Evacuate entire system to 200 microns of mercury. Charge system with 5 psi of R-410a and an inert gas to 245 psi and retest system. Energize crank case heaters 24 hours prior to starting compressor to ensure that all refrigerant liquid is out of the compressor. d. Upon completion of testing, but before the refrigerant piping insulation is applied, the piping must be inspected by a representative of the local goveming authority as necessary. e. Insulate the refrigerant suction lines and condensate lines as specified herein. f. Provide UUULC listed fire stopping system around all piping penetrations through rated walls. Penetrations shall meet the requirements of UUULC details WL1001 (uninsulated wall) and WL5039 (insulated wall). 4. Inspection a. Contractor must prepare and submit a complete piping schematic to the local manufacturer representative for approval prior to beginning installation. Upon completion of piping, this contractor must call the local representative for field inspection of work performed. All items found to be inadequate for proper performance by manufacturer representative must be corrected. This inspection is performed at LSD&C expense. SECTION 233100: HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS A. Metal ductwork - no fiberglass duct allowed 1. No ductwork shall be fabricated prior to job site visit and approval by the general contractor. A sketch must be submitted indicating deviations from design and must be approved by LSD&C's project manager prior to fabrication or installation. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate and install rectangular and round ductwork with galvanized steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" of the latest edition. Where other codes are enforced, (1 E. UMC, BOCA, etc.) Use the most stringent code for duct construction standards. Mechanical 3. Except where otherwise indicated, construct duct systems to the following pressure classifications: a. Supply ducts: 2" w.g., positive b. Retum and exhaust ducts: 2" w.g., negative Except where otherwise indicated, use duct sealants of the following pressure classifications: c. Supply ducts: class B - 3" w.g. d. Retum and exhaust ducts: class C - 2" w.g. In accordance with these construction and sealant pressure classifications, maximum duct air leakage will not exceed 5% as required for final air balance approval. 4. Round ductwork shall be galvanized steel with spiral lockseam construction for all sizes 14" diameter and larger. Round ductwork sizes 13" diameter and smaller may be snap - lock construction. All snap -lock seams shall be sealed as described in these specifications. Round fittings shall be galvanized steel with spot welded and bonded construction. 5. Round spiral galvanized steel ductwork may be used in place of rectangular ductwork in horizontal application when above ceiling clearances permits and equivalent free area is maintained, with the following exception; all supply and retum ductwork within 15 feet of the air handler must be rectangular and internally lined. Once a transition in the direction of the airflow to spiral has been done, duct will not be allowed to revert to rectangular. Where round duct substitution will take place, submit a sketch and chart showing equivalent round conversions of rectangular ductwork to LSD&C project manager's for approval prior to fabrication or installation. 6. Install factory manufactured double thickness tuming vanes in right angle elbows in main duct per latest edition of SMACNA. 7. Install rigid round and rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA standards. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection using double strap hangers on each side of fitting. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor. No wood shall be used to support or brace ducts. Provide sway and seismic bracing as required by state/province and local codes or by landlord. 8. Where ducts pass through roofs and floors, provide as minimum 1-1/2"x1-1/2"x1/8" steel angle frames at each side of opening. The annular space between duct and angle frames shall be caulked with silicone sealant 09 — DIV23 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 or fireproofed as required by assembly fire rating. 9. All joints and seams shall be sealed with 2" wide, glass -fiber -fabric reinforced tape. Joints also shall be riveted or connected with sheet metal screws. Liquid sealants by United McGiII Corp., Dow Coming, Miracle Adhesives and Surebond Inc. will be accepted in lieu of tape. 10. Soft elastomer butyl gasket with adhesive backing shall be used to seal flanged joints. 11. Duct transitions shall not exceed 30 degrees slope except as specifically noted otherwise. 12. Provide access to all motorized dampers, fire dampers, controls, and other items in ductwork that require service or inspection. If the access panel location is exposed to the sales area, it must be approved by LSD&C's project manager prior to installation. In hard ceilings, lay -in supply and retum air diffusers, grilles and registers with plaster frames may be used as access locations when within 3'-0" of device. 13. All ductwork shall be installed with inside dear dimensions as noted on drawings. Where ductwork size is larger than connected device (ie. VAV box, diffuser, register) smooth duct transitions are to take place just prior to device connection. See mechanical drawings for detail. B. Medium pressure duct 1. Where ductwork is specifically noted as medium pressure, it shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA standards for a pressure rating of 4 inches water column minimum or greater as required by landlord. 2. All gauges and reinforcement must meet with the latest edition of SMACNA standards for medium pressure duct and with the landlord's criteria. 3. Connections to the landlord's medium pressure ductwork shall be made with "lo- loss" saddle tee taps or as otherwise required by the landlord. 4. All other items from metal ductwork specification section apply to this section, with the exception that all medium pressure ductwork must be wrapped with insulation, not lined. SECTION 233300: AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Flexible connections 1. Flexible collars shall be fumished and installed in all connections between vibrating equipment (fans, air handlers, etc.) And ducts or casings. Also, fumish and install flexible connections where ducts cross building expansion joints. 2. Flexible connections shall be constructed of neoprene -coated flameproof fabric. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for Mechanical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 movement and prevent the transmission of vibration. B. Flexible air duct 1. Flexible air duct shall be 1" insulated lass 1, UUULC listed and rated for the operating pressure of the system. Duct construction material (plastic, cloth, aluminum) must adhere to local codes and landlord's requirements and be Included as such in the bid. 2. Flexible air duct shall be attached per details on the drawings. Flexible air duct may only be used in vertical applications. 3. Flexible duct shall not extend over 4'-0" in length at any one location. C. Supply air take -off fittings 1. Fumish and install conical, tapered or 45 degree saddle takeoffs from main ductwork to round branches. Installation shall be per SMACNA latest edition. D. Dampers 1. Where designated, fumish and install round balancing dampers. Provide minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel frame and blades with minimum 3/8" square steel axle, and molded synthetic bearings (equivalent to Ruskin model MDRS25) with manual locking position regulator with standoff (equivalent to Duro Dyne model KR). 2. Where designated, fumish and install rectangular volume dampers. Provide minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel channel frame, 16 gauge galvanized steel blades, minimum 1/2" hexagonal axle, molded synthetic bearings, with 3/8" square plated steel control shaft (equivalent to Ruskin Model CD35). Maximum blade width shall not exceed 6". Linkages shall be concealed in the frame. Control shaft shall extend beyond frame and duct covering to a locking quadrant with adjustable lever (equivalent to Duro Dyne model K-4) with standoff. 3. Operating handles on all dampers shall be tagged with a minimum 18" long orange marker tape and shall be installed far enough away from duct to ensure it fully and comfortably clears the insulation when tumed. 4. Where access to balancing damper is restricted, a remote device, manually operated shall be used. Units shall be ordered three weeks before installation to allow for delivery lead time. E. Fire/smoke dampers 1. Fumish and install primary fire dampers where indicated or required by codes. Dampers shall be designed for horizontal or vertical flow of air as required. Fire dampers shall be UUULC labeled and meet all code requirements. 2. Fire dampers shall have the blades out of the airstream and a 165 degree F fusible 010 — DIV23 • VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Store #: #230 Version: 142Fa.01 link, type B, as minimum. Fumish and install access doors as necessary. 3. Fumish and install all necessary framing and sleeves for damper mounting per UUULC and code requirements. 4. Fire/smoke dampers shall be furnished and installed with electric powered mechanism. Coordinate with electrical contractor for power requirements Mechanical 011 — DIV23 • VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL SECTION 260000 — BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Note 1. The abbreviation LSD&C wherever it appears in these electrical drawings and/or specifications shall refer to "limited store design and construction". Any reference to tenant's project manager or fumished by any of the above refers to LSD&C. 2. Drawings and general provisions of contract, Including general and supplementary conditions and all other specification sections, apply to this and the other sections of division 26. 3. The contractor for this division of work is required to read the specifications and review drawings for all divisions of work and is responsible for the coordination of this work and the work of his or her subcontractors with all divisions of work. It is this contractor's responsibility to provide his or her subcontractors with a complete set of bid documents. 4. This electrical contractor is responsible for scheduling the completion and inspection of this work to comply with the LSD&C schedule and the project completion date. 5. This contractor shall visit the site prior to submittal of bid to determine conditions affecting the work. Any items which are not covered in the bid documents or any proposed substitutions shall be listed separately and qualified in the contractors bid. Submittal of bid shall serve as evidence of knowledge of existing conditions and any modifications which are required to meet the intent of the drawings and specifications. Failure to visit the site does not relieve the contractor of responsibility in performance of his or her work. 6. Refer to responsibility schedule on sheet E01.01 of this set for information in regard to responsibility of work or items which may affect bid. B. General Requirements 1. This contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, services, tools, transportation, Incidentals and details necessary to provide a complete electrical system as shown on the drawings, called for in the specifications, and as required by job conditions. All work not specifically noted as being by the landlord or LSD&C shall be provided by this contractor. Closely coordinate the entire installation with the landlord and the LSD&C project manager, as required. Electrical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 2. The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other and any material or labor called for in one shall be fumished and installed even though not specifically mentioned in both. Any material or labor which is neither shown on the drawings nor called for in the specifications, but which is obviously necessary to complete the work, and which is usually Included in work of similar character, shall be fumished and installed as part of contract. 3. Where the drawings or specifications call for items which exceed codes or the landlord's tenant criteria, the contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing the system with the more stringent requirements as designed and described on these drawings, unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. All work in this section shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operating, servicing, maintaining, and repairing. This contractor is responsible for providing sufficient service access to all equipment. 5. All work shall be performed in a neat professional manner using good construction practices. 6. Unless specifically noted otherwise, materials, products, and equipment, including all components thereof, shall be new, Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled and sized in conformity with requirements of state and local codes, whichever is more stringent. 7. This contractor shall do all cutting, chasing and channeling required for any work under this division. Cutting shall have prior approval by LSD&C project manager and the landlord. All patching shall be by G.C. and shall match the surrounding surfaces. 8. The electrical contractor shall make all final electrical connections as required for a complete and operating system. C. Temporary Light And Power 1. This contractor shall fumish and install all temporary wiring and related ground fault interruption protection for light and power for all contractors and is responsible for its removal 2. All temporary lighting will conform with OSHA standards. 3. The general contractor sets up all electrical utilities in the name of limited brands. Limited Brands pays for all utilities throughout construction. D. Codes 1. All work shall conform to the landlords' criteria, the state's, county's, city's, province and local codes and ordinances, safety and health codes, NFPA/NFPAC codes, energy codes and all other applicable codes and requirements. This contractor shall inquire into and comply with all applicable codes, 01 — DIV26 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: #230 ordinances, and regulations. This contractor shall include any changes required by codes in the bid and if these hangers are not included in the bid, they shall be qualified as a separate line item in the bid. After contract is awarded, change orders for increased costs due to code issues will not be accepted by LSD&C, unless allowances have previously been agreed upon. E. Licenses, permits, inspections & fees 1. This contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits, inspections, and fees required or related to his or her work. 2. Furnish to the LSD&C's project manager all certificates of inspection and final inspection approval at completion of project. F. Trade names, manufacturers and shop drawings 1. Where trade names and manufacturers are used on the drawings or in the specifications, the exact equipment shall be used as a minimum for the base bid. Manufacturers considered as an equal or better in all aspects to that specified will be subject to approval in writing by LSD&C's project manager through shop drawing submittal process for acceptance prior to installations. The use of any unauthorized equipment shall be replaced at the contractor's expense. 2. General contractor shall submit only substitution requests to LSD&C project manager for approval. Submissions shall be made early enough in project to allow four (4) working days for LSD&C project manager's review without causing delays or conflicts to the job's progress. Submittals shall bear the stamp of the general contractor and the subcontractor showing that he has reviewed and confirmed that the submittals are in conformance with the contract drawings and specifications or indicate where exceptions have been taken. G. Guarantee 1. This contractor shall guarantee all materials and work provided under his or her contract and shall make good, repair or replace at his or her own expense, any defective work, material, or equipment which may be discovered within a period of 12 months from the date of acceptance of the installation by LSD&C's project manager (in writing). Extended warranties are as specified with individual equipment. 2. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee and provide a 12 month guarantee to LSD&C from the date of acceptance. The contractor shall warrant the installation of this equipment and will be responsible for any damage and/or malfunction caused by the installation. This contractor shall not bear additional warranties beyond a complete working system. H. Record drawings Electrical 1. This contractor shall maintain one set of drawings on the job site updated weekly to record all deviations from contract drawings, such as: a. Location of concealed pullboxes. b. Revisions, addendums, and change orders. c. Significant deviations made necessary by field conditions, approved equipment substitutions, and contractor's coordination with other trades. 2. At completion of the project and before final approval, this contractor shall make any final corrections to drawings and certify the accuracy of each print by signature thereon. Failure to keep these records will allow LSD&C to direct the general contractor to provide these records at his or her expense prior to final payment. I. Discrepancies in documents 1. Drawings (plans, specifications, and details) are diagrammatic and indicate the general location and intent of the mechanical systems. Where drawings, existing site conditions, specifications or other trades conflict or are unclear, advises the general contractor in writing, prior to submittal of bid. The general contractor is responsible to advise LSD&C's project manager, in writing, of variations to contract documents prior to submission of bid. Otherwise, LSD&C project manager's interpretation of contract documents or conditions shall be final with no additional compensation permitted. J. Phasing requirements 1. This contractor is to include in his or her bid all necessary service required to keep the operating phase of the store's HVAC, electrical, plumbing and sprinkler service in operation. Contractor shall schedule in writing with LSD&C's project manager and the landlord one week prior to any shut down of the HVAC, plumbing or fire protection systems. K. Demolition 1. This contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the demolition of existing work and the demolition provided by the general contractor. Coordinate with the general contractor any existing equipment required to be left intact. 2. This contractor shall include, and will be held responsible for, the removal of all existing conduit, fire alarm system, switch gear, pitch, pockets and equipment etc.. Unless specifically noted otherwise. Contractor shall verify with the landlord all presumed abandoned equipment, conduit and switch gear prior to removal. Pitch pockets shall be removed and the roof patched, as required by the landlord. All extraneous items in the space or on the roof not applicable to the 02 — DIV26 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: #230 new work shall be removed and roof/wall/floor patched/repaired to like new condition. Existing abandoned conduit or equipment in the floor, embedded in concrete, or otherwise inaccessible, are to be cut off and sealed below or within floor or wall level when they are not to be reused in this project. If required by landlord or codes, abandoned conduit shall be removed to point of origination. Confirm extent of demolition prior to bid and Include in proposal. 3. All unused communication, data, and low voltage cabling is to be removed in accordance with N.E.C. 725.(3)b and 760.3(a). L. Sleeves 1. This contractor shall provide sleeves to protect equipment or facilities in the installation. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, wall or partition and shall be cut flush with each surface except sleeves that penetrate the floor, which shall extend 2" above the floor. Contractor shall coordinate through the landlord any core drilling or cutting of openings in masonry floors or walls. 2. All sleeves and openings through fire rated walls and/or floors shall be fire sealed with calcium silicate, silicone "RTV" foam, "3m" fire rated sealants or equal, so as to retain their fire rating. 3. Sleeves in bearing and masonry walls, floors, and partitions shall be standard weight steel pipe finished with smooth edges. For other than masonry partitions, through suspended ceilings, or for concealed vertical piping, sleeves shall be no. 22 U.S.G. galvanized steel minimum. M. Hangers 1. Hangers shall include all miscellaneous steel such as angle iron, bands, c-clamps with retaining clips, channels, hanger rods, etc., necessary for the installation of work. 2. Hangers shall be fastened to building steel, concrete, or masonry, but not to piping. Hanging from metal deck is not permitted. Hangers shall be attached to upper chord of bar joist. Where interferences occur, and in order to support ductwork or piping, the contractor shall install trapeze type hangers or supports which shall be located where they do not interfere with access to fire dampers, valves, and other equipment. Hanger types and installation methods are also subject to landlord criteria. 3. Hangers for all insulated piping shall be sized and installed for the outer diameter of insulation. Install 6" long split circle galvanized saddle between the hanger and the pipe insulation. 4. Hangers and piping of dissimilar metals shall be di -electrically separated. Electrical N. Final electrical inspection 1. Aside from normal interim inspections of work in place, LSD&C may have an independent electrical contractor inspect the finished electrical installation upon completion for compliance with the plans, specifications and codes. The installing contractor will be responsible to bring all items reported by the independent electrical contractor up to plans and specification requirements. O. Scope of work 1. This contractor shall fumish all labor, materials, equipment, services, tools, transportation, and facilities necessary for, reasonably implied and Incidental to, the fumishing, installation, completion and testing of all the work for the electrical systems as shown on the drawings, called for in the specifications, and as required by job conditions, to Include, but not be limited to the following: a. A complete electrical distribution system Including the installation of LSD&C furnished power distribution system unit, safety switches, disconnect switches and motor starters (sometimes furnished and installed by contractor), and lighting. It is the electrical contractor's responsibility to include in his or her bid for providing service equipment necessary for tie-in to landlord's distribution equipment or to obtain service from local utility company. Refer to electrical responsibility schedule and electrical power riser diagram for additional information. b. Contractor shall Include in bid all necessary materials required to complete the system Including, but not limited to, feeders, branch circuits, junction boxes, outlet boxes, wiring devices, coverplates, conduits, motor starters, disconnects, etc. c. Metering and current transformers as required by drawings, LSD&C, utility company, and/or landlord. d. The wiring of mechanical equipment as outlined on the bid set drawings and in the specifications. Work shall include wiring of all starters, disconnects, and power wiring of mechanical equipment except as specifically noted otherwise. All low voltage (24 volt) ems temperature control wiring shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor unless noted specifically on drawing. e. Installation of light fixtures and lamps as shown on the drawings Including all devices, equipment, etc. Required for mounting. 03 — DIV26 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: #230 f. A complete conduit system for telephone/data and traffic counter including branch conduits, outlet boxes, pull wires, ground conductors, cover plates, etc. Or as specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. A complete emergency and exit lighting system as shown on the drawings. h. Temporary service as indicated in the specifications, including its removal. i. Final connections to all signs, comice lighting, case lighting, etc. As shown on drawings. j. Installation and wiring of speakers, amplifiers, conduit and final connections for sound system as shown. k. Smoke/fire alarm wiring, devices and conduit, as shown or described on drawings or as necessary to meet landlord, state, local, insurance and fire department requirements. I. Installation of conduits stubbed to above ceiling for HVAC. Also, any additional conduit for HVAC control equipment where plenum rated cables are not permitted. m. Balancing loads. n. As -built, panel description and circuit breaker specific labeling. 2. Work not Included: the following items of electrical construction are not Included in this contract: a. Telephone instruments and wiring unless noted otherwise. b. Data cable wiring unless noted otherwise. 3. Before starting work, this contractor shall examine the architectural, structural, fire protection, mechanical and plumbing plans, shop drawings and specifications to sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of the electrical system, materials and equipment with other contractors to avoid interferences and confrontations. P. Cleaning 1. At the end of the project, this contractor shall clean all equipment, Including light fixtures, to the satisfaction of LSD&C. All dust, dirt, debris, and foreign matter shall be removed from all equipment. g• SECTION 260126 — MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. All connections at panels, lighting contactors and switches are to be made, all splices complete, all fuses in place, and all circuits continuous from point of service connection to its final destination, and all covers and plates installed prior to the Electrical B. C. D. E. time of final inspection by LSD&C's project manager. Upon completion of the work, all parts of the electrical installation shall be tested and proved free of unwanted grounds and other defects. All overload devices, including equipment furnished under other contracts, shall be set and adjusted to suit the Toad conditions. Test and make corrections/adjustments for phase balancing. This contractor is to balance the voltage leaving the step-down transformer to provide a secondary voltage of 120 minimum to 125 volts maximum by adjusting the transformer taps once all the final connections have been made to the low voltage panelboard. Include final balance report with as -built drawings. SECTION 260519 — ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conductors for feeders and branch circuits shall be copper and the AWG size and type as shown on drawings. Minimum wire size shall be #12 and the conductors shall be 600 volt insulation type THW, THWN or THHN. B. Minimum wire size - 20 amp branch circuit shall be AWG listed size per distance shown below. Distance shall be measured from the panelboard circuit breaker to the farthest outlet. 1. #12 Tess than 100 feet 2. #10 between 100 -150 feet 3. #8 between 150 - 250 feet 4. #6 over 250 feet C. On all 20 amp branch circuits, conductors larger than #10 AWG shall be reduced to #10 AWG within 10 feet of panelboard and device in junction boxes on rated terminal strips. D. Conductors may be stranded for sizes #10 AWG and larger. Conductors' size #12 shall be solid. E. Aluminum conductors are not permitted, except at service entrance, where required by landlord. Conductor connection shall be per manufacturer's requirements. Contractor shall obtain written permission from general contractor and LSD&C's project manager when used. F. All wiring shall be in conduit, unless specifically noted otherwise (i.e. Low voltage plenum rated wire). G. The use of Romex or BX cable is not permitted. The use of me cable is not permitted in Canada. H. Wire connectors shall be equal to "scotch lock" for #8 AWG wire and smaller and equal to T & B "Locktighr" for #6 AWG and larger. I. No other circuits are to be run in same conduit feeding isolated ground receptacles. 04 — DIV26 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 SECTION 260523 — CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES A. United States 1. Fumish and install a system of conduit raceways, outlet boxes and pull wires as shown on the drawings unless otherwise noted on plans. Telephone switching apparatus, conductors, instruments, miscellaneous equipment and appurtenances are not part of this contract and will be provided and installed by LSD&C. 2. Outlet boxes to be 4" square minimum with single device cover and telephone plate. 3. Conduit runs from ifs enclosure or manager's office for telephone and data lines to cashwraps are to be continuous with no junction boxes except as noted otherwise on drawings. 4. All pull wires are to be labeled for purpose designated. 5. No other circuits are to be run in same conduit feeding isolated ground receptacles. 6. Electrical contractor shall refer to mechanical drawings for additional electrical work to be Included in his or her bid. 7. Electrical contractor shall do all power wirings, line voltage wirings, and line voltage control wiring indicated under the heating, ventilation and air conditioning, plumbing and fire protection specifications and drawings. This contractor shall also do all interconnecting line voltage wirings between relays and switches as required. 8. Electrical contractor is responsible for fumishing and installing conduit for HVAC control wiring where required by code or shown on prints to be in conduit. Refer to plans for requirements and size. 9. Fire and/or smoke dampers shall be wired by electrical contractor. Coordinate with HVAC contractor for power requirements. 10. Refer to mechanical drawings for available schematic wiring diagrams of equipment. B. Canada 1. All CCTV cables to be cat5e type and white in color. 5'-0" loop of cable to be left at DVR and 10'-0" loop of cable to be left at equipment location end coiled up in ceiling. 2. All security/ADDT cabling to be 22/4 non - shielded ft6 type. No conduit required if run within the plenum. 5'-0" loop of cable to be left at the control panel end and 5'-0" to be left at the equipment location coiled in ceiling. SECTION 260526-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Electrical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 A. Fumish and install complete wired grounding conductor system, #12 AWG minimum, sized and installed in accordance with the latest adopted edition of the national electrical code, state and local codes, the landlord's tenant criteria, as noted in the specifications, and as indicated on the drawings. B. All conduits, including flexible metal conduit, shall be grounded with a green grounding conductor. C. Grounding connections made to the water piping system shall be coordinated with the plumbing contractor and a bonding jumper installed around water meter per codes and as indicated on drawings. D. All devices shall be bonded to the conduit system. Use a bonding jumper between the outlet box and the device grounding terminal. Metal -to -metal contact between the device yoke and the outlet box is not acceptable as a bond for either surface mounted boxes or flush type boxes. All junction boxes, outlet boxes, and pull boxes shall be bonded to the conduit system. E. Run a separate isolated grounding conductor, #12 AWG minimum, in each conduit feeding the cashwrap, the Sensormatic and other computerized equipment as shown on drawings. F. All enclosures and non -current carrying metal parts are to be grounded. Conduit system is to be electrically continuous. All locknuts shall cut through enameled or painted surfaces on enclosures. Where enclosures and non -current carrying metal parts are isolated from the conduit system, use bonding jumpers with approved clamps. All ground clamps shall be "Penn -union" or equal, similar to "GPL" type. SECTION 260533-RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. This contractor shall fumish and install all conduits serving all equipment, Including but not limited to, lighting, receptacles, heating, air conditioning, plumbing equipment, telephone, data, speakers, security, pager, traffic counting system and electrical equipment. B. All conduits shall be galvanized IMC or EMT unless otherwise specified in specifications or on drawings. All conduit is to be UUULC labeled. EMT connectors shall be steel compression or set screw type. Conduit under slab on grade shall be rigid steel, or schedule 40 PVC with rigid steel ells where permitted by landlord or code. C. Minimum size of conduit shall be: 1. Main feeder conduit to 2" or larger for all applications. 2. 1/2" minimum for all locations (if acceptable by the landlord and local code officials), unless noted otherwise in plans, specifications, or drawings. 05 — DIV26 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 3. If HVAC control wiring is required to be run in conduit, it shall be a minimum of 3/4", unless noted otherwise on drawings. 4. All in/under floor conduit shall be of minimum 3/4" size. 5. All fire alarm conduit shall be of minimum 3/4" size. D. Support all conduit, Including seismic and sway bracing, in accordance with the locally adapted codes. E. Generally, all conduit shall be concealed except for unfinished areas, such as equipment rooms. Exposed conduit shall be allowed only as noted on plan and as approved by LSD&C's project manager. Painting of conduits, noted on drawings or specifications will be by general contractor. F. Flexible metal conduit, MC type cable or AC90(Canada) 1. Flexible metal conduit, MC type cable or AC90(Canada) shall be used for the following applications only: a. Final connections to motors. b. Final connections into and out of the transformer. c. Final connections to vibrating equipment. d. Inter -connections between all recessed light fixtures and junction boxes. e. Final connections where rigid conduit is not practical. f. In walls (for light switches and 120 volt power receptacles and HVAC control equipment). 2. Flexible metal conduit or AC90 (Canada) shall be the same size as the IMC or EMT conduit to which it is connected. Both the flexible metal conduit, or AC90 (Canada) and its fittings are to be listed for grounding. A green grounding conductor shall be installed. All connectors are to be of a NEMA approved type. 3. Length of flexible metal conduit, MC type cable, or AC90 (Canada) is not to exceed 6'- 0". 4. The use of Romex or BX cable is not permitted. 5. E. Connection to any outdoor equipment shall be made with Liquidtight flexible metal conduit or AC90 (Canada). G. Provide pull -wire in all empty conduits except as noted otherwise on drawings. H. Home runs and main conduit runs are to be held tight to structure above or as required to allow proper service access and other trades work. Conduit shall be trapezed to allow 3 feet minimum clearance above ceiling. I. All conduits shall be sized per locally adopted codes. J. All Sensormatic wiring shall be placed in EMT, IMC, or RMC conduit. PVC is not allowed. Electrical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 K. All outlet boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel of the standard knockout type. No round outlet boxes shall be permitted unless indicated and for lighting that require such configuration. Concealed boxes shall not be less than single gang and 1-1/2" deep, with plaster rings. L. All knockout boxes, upon which lighting fixtures are to be installed, shall be equipped with 3/8" fixture studs. M. Exterior boxes shall be cast rust -resisting metal with gasketed covers. N. Install boxes rigidly from building structure and support independently of the conduit system. Also provide suitable box extensions to extend boxes to finished faces of floors, ceilings, walls etc. All outlet boxes to be provided with caddy "quick -mount box support" to minimize the deflection that occurs when plugging/unplugging into these devices. O. Unless otherwise noted on drawings or otherwise required by the national electrical code, accessibility codes or local codes, outlet heights shall be as follows: 1. Switch height 42" from finished floor to centerline of outlet. 2. Convenience outlets: a. Sales areas: mounted on the wall 15" AFF unless indicated or horizontally mounted in baseboard beneath cabinets, as shown on drawings, or as required by local codes. See drawings. b. Non -sales area: 15" from finished floor to centerline of outlet. 3. Telephone outlets shall be located as noted on drawings. P. The plans indicate only schematic routings for conduit runs. This contractor shall fumish and install additional boxes where required by field conditions or by code. Q. Boxes and covers shall be galvanized steel of code gauge size R. Arrange circuits to avoid the use of junction boxes in inaccessible locations. The use of junction boxes above drywall ceilings should be limited to locations near access frames used for diffusers and retum air grilles or access panels as located on plans. SECTION 260553-IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. For all U.S projects all wiring shall be color -coded as follows: 1. 120/208 Volt System a. neutral — white b. phase A or L1 - black c. phase B or L2 — red d. phase C or L3 - blue e. ground — green f. isolated ground green with yellow tracer 06 — DIV26 VICTORIA'S SECRET Store #: #230 2. 277/480 Volt System a. neutral - gray b. phase A or L1 - brown c. phase B or L2 - orange d. phase C or L3 - yellow e. ground — green B. For Canadian project all wiring shall be color - coded as follows: 1. 120/208 Volt System a. neutral — white b. phase A or L1 - red c. phase B or L2 — black d. phase C or L3 - blue e. ground — green f. isolated ground - green with yellow tracer 2. 347/600 Volt System a. neutral - gray b. phase A or L1 - red c. phase B or L2 - black d. phase C or L3 - blue e. ground — green C. Junction and pull boxes shall be labeled with circuit number identification and system type on cover. SECTION 260923-LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Lighting control panel will be provided by LSD&C through control manufacturer, mounted in ifs panel with conduit, installed by the electrical contractor. The control panel shall be programmed and complete when shipped to the job site. The electrical contractor will be responsible to pull all wires as detailed on these drawings and circuited exactly as diagrammed on the electrical plan drawings. No variations to the circuiting are allowed without prior written approval by LSD&C's project manager. B. Dimming system will be provided by LSD&C through lighting supplier, installed by the electrical contractor. The electrical contractor will be responsible to pull all wires as detailed on these drawings and circuit exactly as diagrammed on the electrical plan drawings. No variations to the circuiting are allowed without prior written approval by LSD&C's project manager. SECTION 262213-DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Transformers are generally included in the IFS switchgear. If not, transformer shall be pad mounted or shall be securely mounted from the building structure, reinforced walls or as noted on Electrical Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 drawings. Use additional vibration isolators at points of mounting to cut vibration noises. Use flexible metallic conduit with grounding bushing for primary and secondary connections to transformer. Transformers shall be located, set, mounted and connected in such a manner as to keep noise levels within the surrounding ambient noise levels and maintain all code required clearances. B. Transformer shall be quiet type construction and have six (6) 2-1/2% taps, two (2) taps above and four (4) taps below normal primary rating. C. Transformer to be class 1 efficiency level for distribution transformers as specified in table 4-2 of the "guide for distribution transformers" as published by national electrical manufacturer assoc. (NEMA tp-1 2000). SECTION 262416-PANELBOARDS A. All panelboards shall be factory assembled of the bolted circuit breaker type with solid copper bussing, full sized copper neutral, 100% ground bushing, and overall hinged/lockable door. All circuit breakers shall be of the quick -make and quick -break design, thermal -magnetic type, trip free and trip -indicating. All panels shall be dead front and flush or surface mounted as shown. B. Contractor shall fumish and install a typewritten directory card of the circuits and place in panel door. The directory shall identify the specific room location for each circuit. C. All panelboards phase amperage shall be balanced to within 7 percent max. to min. Rearrange non -lighting branch circuits as required and note changes on record drawings. Lighting panel circuit breakers shall be installed and wired exactly as shown on drawings. D. If loose panelboards are used, panelboards shall be mounted on minimum 3/4" A/D plywood and painted in a color to match the surrounding walls or a color as required by local code. Plywood shall extend 1 foot minimum beyond edge of equipment. E. Panelboards shall have a minimum short circuit current rating and lug connections as follows: 1. 120/208 volt panelboards: 10,000 A.I.C. 2. 277/480 volt panelboards: 14,000 A.I.C. 3. 347/600 volt panelboards: 14,000 A.I.C. 4. Verify actual A.I.C. short circuit current requirements with the landlord or utility company and verify switchgear compliance prior to installing equipment. All lug connections to be 75°c rated. F. IFS enclosure fumished by LSD&C and installed by electrical contractor is herein described: 1. Unit will be shipped to the project in multiple sections and the electrical contractor will be responsible for off-loading of equipment, inspection of equipment for damages, verification of equipment received, ensuring 07 — DIV26 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Version: 142Fa.01 Store #: #230 that the equipment received is complete and meets the scheduled panels for the project, moving and mounting of sections as well as reassembling of same into one complete unit per manufacturer's requirements. 2. Electrical contractor is to connect all provided interconnecting cables between sections and torque connections per manufacturer's requirements. Contractor is to anchor panel system in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and local codes in seismic zones. 3. Electrical contractor is to connect lighting branch circuits to appropriate load terminals or PRC limiter panel provided within ifs enclosure per lighting zones indicated in the panel schedule (i.e.: zone a, b, c, or d)and current limiting breaker schedule. Line side wiring and lighting control wiring will be prewired by manufacturer at factory. Coordinate exact terminal number for each circuit connection with manufacturer's drawings. 4. All lighting, receptacle and miscellaneous branch circuits not specified as being controlled, are to be wired directly to the corresponding branch breaker in the designated panel. 5. All connections within the telephone/data section and HVAC control section of the IFS enclosure are to be performed by others. 6. Electrical contractor will only be responsible for installation of the conduit system into the low voltage section of the IFS panel. 7. PRC limiter panel is compliant with Califomia title 24, sect. 130 c(3) and ASHRAE. SECTION 262726-WIRING DEVICES A. This contractor shall fumish and install switches and receptacles, unless noted otherwise, as necessary for a complete installation. Color of devices and plates shall be selected by LSD&C. The devices shall be of the types and ratings listed, or equals by arrow -hart, Hubbell or pass & Seymour. Weatherproof GFI receptacles shall be installed where shown on drawings or as required by code. 1. Single pole toggle switches: 20 amp,120- 277v: pass & Seymour "PS20AC1-W" 2. Three way switches: 20 amp, 120-277v: pass & Seymour "PS20AC3-W" 3. Duplex receptacles: 20 amp, 125v: pass & Seymour "BR2OW" 4. Isolated ground receptacles: 20 amp, 125v: pass & Seymour "IG6300W" 5. Ground fault circuit interrupting receptacles: 20 amp, 125v: pass & Seymour "2094-W" B. All device coverplates shall be pass and Seymour series "TP" or equal. Electrical SECTION 262816-ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Safety and disconnect switches shall be heavy duty type, quick -make, quick -break fused or non - fusible with ratings and sizes as noted on plans and required by codes. B. Switches shall be weatherproof in outdoor locations or as required by local codes. C. At service entrance, disconnect shall bear the manufacturer's label indicating the equipment is UUULC rated for application in accordance with all codes. D. Cutler hammer or equal manual motor starters, less overload protection heaters, are to be used as a disconnecting means only where indicated on drawings for motors above 1 1/2 HP at 120 volts and 2 HP at 240 volts that do not require auxiliary control. Motors that are below the 1 1/2 HP at 120 volts, 2 HP at 240 volts, water heater and rolling grille are to be provided with Hubbell "HBL-1221, or 1222" AC switch. E. Magnetic motor starters shall be provided with reset type overloads that closely match motor nameplate rating and shall be electrically held (minimum size #1 in a NEMA 1 enclosure) and be used for all single phase and three phase motors rated above 1/2 HP that require auxiliary control. Provide control devices (auxiliary contacts, transformers, h-o-a, etc.) In starters as required for interlocks. Coordinate all control devices with mechanical contractor. Combination starter/disconnect switches shall contain fusible switches and only used where indicated on drawings. SECTION 265100-INTERIOR LIGHTING A. This contractor shall install all lighting fixtures and lamps as shown on the fixture schedule. Lighting fixtures and lamps are supplied by LSD&C, unless noted otherwise. Contractor is to replace all non -working lamps prior to merchandise date and is to include cost in bid. B. All recessed Incandescent fixtures shall be provided with applicable thermal protection. C. Where fluorescent fixtures are specified, they shall be provided with high power factor rapid start ballasts, U.L./U.L.0 listed, C.B.M. certified, and E.T.L. approved with efficiency factors in accordance with "the energy policy act of 1992" and its amendments as a minimum. D. This contractor shall fumish additional auxiliary support steel hanger wires adequately sized to support the weight of the fixture fastened to the building structure (minimum two per fixture) for all fixtures in lay -in ceilings and other fixtures as required by the landlord and local code officials. E. Fumish and install applicable fire rated drywall boxes over recessed fixtures in fire rated ceilings 08 — DIV26 VICTORIA'S SECRET Issued: 05/16/2014 Store #: #230 Version: 142Fa.01 as required by codes. Field coordinate as required to avoid conflicts. Electrical 09 — DIV26 16435 NORTH SCOTTSDALE ROAD SUITE 195 SCOTTSDALE. ARIZONA 85254 USA WWW.FITCH.COM July 11,2014 T ♦1 4808984200 F +1 480 996 7223 City of Tukwila Jennifer Marshall Permit Technician 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Office 206-431-3670 Fax 206-431-3665 • VICTORIA'S SECRET Southcenter Mall 230 Southcenter Mall Space #100 Tukwila, WA 98188 FITCH JUL 17 2014 °ca CENTER Please review the summary below concerning comments received 06.23.14 BUILDING PLAN REVIEW 1. The plans reference 2009 Seattle Codes. Please revise plans as necessary to comply with and reference 2012 International Codes. Response: Revised Code list on Cover Sheet indicating the correct and current Codes. 2. Please provide a Washington State Energy Code Interior Lighting Budget. Response: Revised Energy Forms to 2012 WA State Energy Compliance Forms — Interior Lighting Budget. 3. Please have the Engineer of record add a statement of Special Inspections to the structural plans as required by section 1704.3 of IBC. Response: Statement of special inspections added to sheet S01.01. 4. Several Details show plywood or fire treated plywood with the inside face exposed in a concealed space or a wall cavity. Per section 603.1 IBC. Fire retardant materials are limited to non -bearing partitions. Wood or fire retardant wood exposed in concealed spaces or plenums will need to be backed with drywall or some other method to comply with Type II noncombustible construction. Please revise plans and details as necessary. Response: Revised details (A/A08.10, J/A08.10, B/A08.15, F/A08.15 & M/08.15) to F.R.T. Plywood as per discussions with iA,t Dave Larson on July 10, 2014. CORRECTION DH-01' �rnr Please do not hesitate to contact me with any questions at (480) 998-4200. Respectfully submitted, Edward R. Roblee Project Manager ed.roblee@fitch.com Page 2 of 2 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development June 23, 2014 MARY RYAN PO BOX 3749 MISSION VIEJO, CA 92690 RE: Correction Letter # 1 DEVELOPMENT Permit Application Number D14-0173 VICTORIA'S SECRET - Dear MARY RYAN, Jim Haggerton, Mayor Jack Pace, Director This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: BUILDING DEPARTMENT: Dave Larson at 206-431-3678 if you have questions regarding these comments. 1) The plans reference 2009 Seattle Codes. Please revise plans as necessary to comply with and reference 2012 International Codes. 2) Please provide a Washington State Energy Code Interior Lighting Budget. 3) Please have the Engineer of record add a statement of special inspections to the structural plans as required by section 1704.3 of the IBC. 4) Several details show plywood or fire treated plywood with the inside face exposed in a concealed space or a wall cavity. Per section 603.1 IBC, fire retardant materials are limited to nonbearing partitions. Wood or fire retardant wood exposed in concealed spaces or plenums will need to be backed with drywall or some other method to comply with type II noncombustible construction. Please revise plans and details as necessary. Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, I can be reached at 206-433-7165. Sincerely, Jennifer Marshall ermil Technician File No. D14-0173 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER 14417 PROJECT NAME: VICTORIA'S SECRET SITE ADDRESS: 230 SOUTHCENTER MALL X _ Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # 1 i 07/17/20 Revision # before Permit issued Revision #_ after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Hi Public Works Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division Permit Coordinator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: 07/22/14 Structural Review Required DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Corrections Required (corrections entered in Reviews) Notation: DUE DATE: 08/19/14 Approved with Conditions Denied (ie: Zoning Issues) coo alt.49 v�e,60-) vvo-tiCe 51Ne1 koi pis cA1.0-s 0)AD REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Perm t Center USe 01' y � . CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 ?ERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D14-0173 DATE: 06/10/2014 PROJECT NAME: VICTORIA'S SECRET SITE ADDRESS: 230 SOUTHCENTER MALL X Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued Response to Correction Letter # Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: VL cow ftl.(1 Building Division (J� Public Works Aw , 0(j 't9 DR. MIS- (p.t2'(`t Fire Prevention . Planning Division I. Structural El Permit Coordinator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable n (no approval/review required) DATE: 06/12/14 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Corrections Required DUE DATE: 07/10/14 Approved with Conditions ❑ Denied (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) C Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov Revision submittalsmust be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: J UL ( l l 1 2t CI ►v1 Plan Check/Permit Number: Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # 1 Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: Victoria's Secret Project Address: 230 Southcenter Mall Contact Person: EcAls'`sa.t' r eG. Summary of Revision: - LE-r-cee_ -(2 cA-K PP-013 IrrvilgMeowwilA SA. 1 ? 2014 PERMRc Phone Number: I4& . c c 8' 4200 �eT. crx-tt -t rs _ Ce • 25- 4 4j:)s€p C c +*� . REASro I.E zr,rte 3 . R U S cAa►L_ SIMACXOac.L 4t 4 . Reotsex> 'Deu1Ls Fte_ Cap crs wito a -rt4 tau l.o ate. Sheet Number(s): SQS 1. t (t Ade'. I46 4 ActiB. i . "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: C1[11tt1`-1 Entered in TRAKiT on C\Users\jennifer-m\Desktop'Revision Submittal Form.doc Revised: May 2011 PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC Page 1 of 2 01 Washington State Department of Labor & Industries PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC Owner or tradesperson ESTERLING, VONNIE RAE Principals ESTERLING, VONNIE RAE, PRESIDENT Doing business as PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC WA UBI No. 601 744 941 Parent company PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC. P.O. BOX 368 GLENWOOD, IA 51534 712-527-9745 Business type Corporation License Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Construction Contractor Active. Meets current requirements. License specialties GENERAL License no. PINNACI941 K3 Effective — expiration 05/31/2006— 07/19/2016 Bond MERCHANTS BONDING CO (MUTUAL) Bond account no. WA16600 $12,000.00 Received by L&I Effective date 05/31/2006 05/26/2006 Expiration date Until Canceled Insurance Employers Mutual Casualty Co $1,000,000.00 Policy no. 1D24213 Received by L&I Effective date 04/15/2014 04/01/2013 Expiration date 04/01/2015 Insurance history https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=601744941 &LIC=PINNACI941 K3&SAW= 07/28/2014